Annotation of gcc/expr.c, revision 1.1.1.2

1.1       root        1: /* Convert tree expression to rtl instructions, for GNU compiler.
                      2:    Copyright (C) 1988, 1992 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
                      3: 
                      4: This file is part of GNU CC.
                      5: 
                      6: GNU CC is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
                      7: it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
                      8: the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
                      9: any later version.
                     10: 
                     11: GNU CC is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
                     12: but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
                     13: MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
                     14: GNU General Public License for more details.
                     15: 
                     16: You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
                     17: along with GNU CC; see the file COPYING.  If not, write to
                     18: the Free Software Foundation, 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.  */
                     19: 
                     20: 
                     21: #include "config.h"
                     22: #include "rtl.h"
                     23: #include "tree.h"
                     24: #include "flags.h"
                     25: #include "function.h"
                     26: #include "insn-flags.h"
                     27: #include "insn-codes.h"
                     28: #include "expr.h"
                     29: #include "insn-config.h"
                     30: #include "recog.h"
                     31: #include "output.h"
                     32: #include "gvarargs.h"
                     33: #include "typeclass.h"
                     34: 
                     35: #define CEIL(x,y) (((x) + (y) - 1) / (y))
                     36: 
                     37: /* Decide whether a function's arguments should be processed
                     38:    from first to last or from last to first.  */
                     39: 
                     40: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                     41: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                     42: #define PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED     /* If it's last to first */
                     43: #endif
                     44: #endif
                     45: 
                     46: #ifndef STACK_PUSH_CODE
                     47: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                     48: #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_DEC
                     49: #else
                     50: #define STACK_PUSH_CODE PRE_INC
                     51: #endif
                     52: #endif
                     53: 
                     54: /* Like STACK_BOUNDARY but in units of bytes, not bits.  */
                     55: #define STACK_BYTES (STACK_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT)
                     56: 
                     57: /* If this is nonzero, we do not bother generating VOLATILE
                     58:    around volatile memory references, and we are willing to
                     59:    output indirect addresses.  If cse is to follow, we reject
                     60:    indirect addresses so a useful potential cse is generated;
                     61:    if it is used only once, instruction combination will produce
                     62:    the same indirect address eventually.  */
                     63: int cse_not_expected;
                     64: 
                     65: /* Nonzero to generate code for all the subroutines within an
                     66:    expression before generating the upper levels of the expression.
                     67:    Nowadays this is never zero.  */
                     68: int do_preexpand_calls = 1;
                     69: 
                     70: /* Number of units that we should eventually pop off the stack.
                     71:    These are the arguments to function calls that have already returned.  */
                     72: int pending_stack_adjust;
                     73: 
                     74: /* Nonzero means stack pops must not be deferred, and deferred stack
                     75:    pops must not be output.  It is nonzero inside a function call,
                     76:    inside a conditional expression, inside a statement expression,
                     77:    and in other cases as well.  */
                     78: int inhibit_defer_pop;
                     79: 
                     80: /* A list of all cleanups which belong to the arguments of
                     81:    function calls being expanded by expand_call.  */
                     82: tree cleanups_this_call;
                     83: 
                     84: /* Nonzero means __builtin_saveregs has already been done in this function.
                     85:    The value is the pseudoreg containing the value __builtin_saveregs
                     86:    returned.  */
                     87: static rtx saveregs_value;
                     88: 
                     89: rtx store_expr ();
                     90: static void store_constructor ();
                     91: static rtx store_field ();
                     92: static rtx expand_builtin ();
                     93: static rtx compare ();
                     94: static rtx do_store_flag ();
                     95: static void preexpand_calls ();
                     96: static rtx expand_increment ();
                     97: static void init_queue ();
                     98: 
                     99: void do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                    100: static void do_jump_for_compare ();
                    101: static void do_jump_by_parts_equality ();
                    102: static void do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx ();
                    103: static void do_jump_by_parts_greater ();
                    104: 
                    105: /* MOVE_RATIO is the number of move instructions that is better than
                    106:    a block move.  */
                    107: 
                    108: #ifndef MOVE_RATIO
                    109: #if defined (HAVE_movstrqi) || defined (HAVE_movstrhi) || defined (HAVE_movstrsi) || defined (HAVE_movstrdi)
                    110: #define MOVE_RATIO 2
                    111: #else
                    112: /* A value of around 6 would minimize code size; infinity would minimize
                    113:    execution time.  */
                    114: #define MOVE_RATIO 15
                    115: #endif
                    116: #endif
1.1.1.2 ! root      117: 
        !           118: /* SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS is non-zero if unaligned accesses are very slow. */
        !           119: 
        !           120: #ifndef SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
        !           121: #define SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS 0
        !           122: #endif
1.1       root      123: 
                    124: /* This is run at the start of compiling a function.  */
                    125: 
                    126: void
                    127: init_expr ()
                    128: {
                    129:   init_queue ();
                    130: 
                    131:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                    132:   inhibit_defer_pop = 0;
                    133:   cleanups_this_call = 0;
                    134:   saveregs_value = 0;
1.1.1.2 ! root      135:   forced_labels = 0;
1.1       root      136: }
                    137: 
                    138: /* Save all variables describing the current status into the structure *P.
                    139:    This is used before starting a nested function.  */
                    140: 
                    141: void
                    142: save_expr_status (p)
                    143:      struct function *p;
                    144: {
                    145:   /* Instead of saving the postincrement queue, empty it.  */
                    146:   emit_queue ();
                    147: 
                    148:   p->pending_stack_adjust = pending_stack_adjust;
                    149:   p->inhibit_defer_pop = inhibit_defer_pop;
                    150:   p->cleanups_this_call = cleanups_this_call;
                    151:   p->saveregs_value = saveregs_value;
1.1.1.2 ! root      152:   p->forced_labels = forced_labels;
1.1       root      153: 
                    154:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                    155:   inhibit_defer_pop = 0;
                    156:   cleanups_this_call = 0;
                    157:   saveregs_value = 0;
1.1.1.2 ! root      158:   forced_labels = 0;
1.1       root      159: }
                    160: 
                    161: /* Restore all variables describing the current status from the structure *P.
                    162:    This is used after a nested function.  */
                    163: 
                    164: void
                    165: restore_expr_status (p)
                    166:      struct function *p;
                    167: {
                    168:   pending_stack_adjust = p->pending_stack_adjust;
                    169:   inhibit_defer_pop = p->inhibit_defer_pop;
                    170:   cleanups_this_call = p->cleanups_this_call;
                    171:   saveregs_value = p->saveregs_value;
1.1.1.2 ! root      172:   forced_labels = p->forced_labels;
1.1       root      173: }
                    174: 
                    175: /* Manage the queue of increment instructions to be output
                    176:    for POSTINCREMENT_EXPR expressions, etc.  */
                    177: 
                    178: static rtx pending_chain;
                    179: 
                    180: /* Queue up to increment (or change) VAR later.  BODY says how:
                    181:    BODY should be the same thing you would pass to emit_insn
                    182:    to increment right away.  It will go to emit_insn later on.
                    183: 
                    184:    The value is a QUEUED expression to be used in place of VAR
                    185:    where you want to guarantee the pre-incrementation value of VAR.  */
                    186: 
                    187: static rtx
                    188: enqueue_insn (var, body)
                    189:      rtx var, body;
                    190: {
                    191:   pending_chain = gen_rtx (QUEUED, GET_MODE (var),
                    192:                           var, 0, 0, body, pending_chain);
                    193:   return pending_chain;
                    194: }
                    195: 
                    196: /* Use protect_from_queue to convert a QUEUED expression
                    197:    into something that you can put immediately into an instruction.
                    198:    If the queued incrementation has not happened yet,
                    199:    protect_from_queue returns the variable itself.
                    200:    If the incrementation has happened, protect_from_queue returns a temp
                    201:    that contains a copy of the old value of the variable.
                    202: 
                    203:    Any time an rtx which might possibly be a QUEUED is to be put
                    204:    into an instruction, it must be passed through protect_from_queue first.
                    205:    QUEUED expressions are not meaningful in instructions.
                    206: 
                    207:    Do not pass a value through protect_from_queue and then hold
                    208:    on to it for a while before putting it in an instruction!
                    209:    If the queue is flushed in between, incorrect code will result.  */
                    210: 
                    211: rtx
                    212: protect_from_queue (x, modify)
                    213:      register rtx x;
                    214:      int modify;
                    215: {
                    216:   register RTX_CODE code = GET_CODE (x);
                    217: 
                    218: #if 0  /* A QUEUED can hang around after the queue is forced out.  */
                    219:   /* Shortcut for most common case.  */
                    220:   if (pending_chain == 0)
                    221:     return x;
                    222: #endif
                    223: 
                    224:   if (code != QUEUED)
                    225:     {
                    226:       /* A special hack for read access to (MEM (QUEUED ...))
                    227:         to facilitate use of autoincrement.
                    228:         Make a copy of the contents of the memory location
                    229:         rather than a copy of the address, but not
                    230:         if the value is of mode BLKmode.  */
                    231:       if (code == MEM && GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode
                    232:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == QUEUED && !modify)
                    233:        {
                    234:          register rtx y = XEXP (x, 0);
                    235:          XEXP (x, 0) = QUEUED_VAR (y);
                    236:          if (QUEUED_INSN (y))
                    237:            {
                    238:              register rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (x));
                    239:              emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (temp, x),
                    240:                                QUEUED_INSN (y));
                    241:              return temp;
                    242:            }
                    243:          return x;
                    244:        }
                    245:       /* Otherwise, recursively protect the subexpressions of all
                    246:         the kinds of rtx's that can contain a QUEUED.  */
                    247:       if (code == MEM)
                    248:        XEXP (x, 0) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                    249:       else if (code == PLUS || code == MULT)
                    250:        {
                    251:          XEXP (x, 0) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 0), 0);
                    252:          XEXP (x, 1) = protect_from_queue (XEXP (x, 1), 0);
                    253:        }
                    254:       return x;
                    255:     }
                    256:   /* If the increment has not happened, use the variable itself.  */
                    257:   if (QUEUED_INSN (x) == 0)
                    258:     return QUEUED_VAR (x);
                    259:   /* If the increment has happened and a pre-increment copy exists,
                    260:      use that copy.  */
                    261:   if (QUEUED_COPY (x) != 0)
                    262:     return QUEUED_COPY (x);
                    263:   /* The increment has happened but we haven't set up a pre-increment copy.
                    264:      Set one up now, and use it.  */
                    265:   QUEUED_COPY (x) = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (QUEUED_VAR (x)));
                    266:   emit_insn_before (gen_move_insn (QUEUED_COPY (x), QUEUED_VAR (x)),
                    267:                    QUEUED_INSN (x));
                    268:   return QUEUED_COPY (x);
                    269: }
                    270: 
                    271: /* Return nonzero if X contains a QUEUED expression:
                    272:    if it contains anything that will be altered by a queued increment.
                    273:    We handle only combinations of MEM, PLUS, MINUS and MULT operators
                    274:    since memory addresses generally contain only those.  */
                    275: 
                    276: static int
                    277: queued_subexp_p (x)
                    278:      rtx x;
                    279: {
                    280:   register enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x);
                    281:   switch (code)
                    282:     {
                    283:     case QUEUED:
                    284:       return 1;
                    285:     case MEM:
                    286:       return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0));
                    287:     case MULT:
                    288:     case PLUS:
                    289:     case MINUS:
                    290:       return queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 0))
                    291:        || queued_subexp_p (XEXP (x, 1));
                    292:     }
                    293:   return 0;
                    294: }
                    295: 
                    296: /* Perform all the pending incrementations.  */
                    297: 
                    298: void
                    299: emit_queue ()
                    300: {
                    301:   register rtx p;
                    302:   while (p = pending_chain)
                    303:     {
                    304:       QUEUED_INSN (p) = emit_insn (QUEUED_BODY (p));
                    305:       pending_chain = QUEUED_NEXT (p);
                    306:     }
                    307: }
                    308: 
                    309: static void
                    310: init_queue ()
                    311: {
                    312:   if (pending_chain)
                    313:     abort ();
                    314: }
                    315: 
                    316: /* Copy data from FROM to TO, where the machine modes are not the same.
                    317:    Both modes may be integer, or both may be floating.
                    318:    UNSIGNEDP should be nonzero if FROM is an unsigned type.
                    319:    This causes zero-extension instead of sign-extension.  */
                    320: 
                    321: void
                    322: convert_move (to, from, unsignedp)
                    323:      register rtx to, from;
                    324:      int unsignedp;
                    325: {
                    326:   enum machine_mode to_mode = GET_MODE (to);
                    327:   enum machine_mode from_mode = GET_MODE (from);
                    328:   int to_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (to_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
                    329:   int from_real = GET_MODE_CLASS (from_mode) == MODE_FLOAT;
                    330:   enum insn_code code;
                    331:   rtx libcall;
                    332: 
                    333:   /* rtx code for making an equivalent value.  */
                    334:   enum rtx_code equiv_code = (unsignedp ? ZERO_EXTEND : SIGN_EXTEND);
                    335: 
                    336:   to = protect_from_queue (to, 1);
                    337:   from = protect_from_queue (from, 0);
                    338: 
                    339:   if (to_real != from_real)
                    340:     abort ();
                    341: 
                    342:   if (to_mode == from_mode
                    343:       || (from_mode == VOIDmode && CONSTANT_P (from)))
                    344:     {
                    345:       emit_move_insn (to, from);
                    346:       return;
                    347:     }
                    348: 
                    349:   if (to_real)
                    350:     {
                    351: #ifdef HAVE_extendsfdf2
                    352:       if (HAVE_extendsfdf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    353:        {
                    354:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendsfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    355:          return;
                    356:        }
                    357: #endif
                    358: #ifdef HAVE_extendsftf2
                    359:       if (HAVE_extendsftf2 && from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == TFmode)
                    360:        {
                    361:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendsftf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    362:          return;
                    363:        }
                    364: #endif
                    365: #ifdef HAVE_extenddftf2
                    366:       if (HAVE_extenddftf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == TFmode)
                    367:        {
                    368:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extenddftf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    369:          return;
                    370:        }
                    371: #endif
                    372: #ifdef HAVE_truncdfsf2
                    373:       if (HAVE_truncdfsf2 && from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    374:        {
                    375:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    376:          return;
                    377:        }
                    378: #endif
                    379: #ifdef HAVE_trunctfsf2
                    380:       if (HAVE_trunctfsf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    381:        {
                    382:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfsf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    383:          return;
                    384:        }
                    385: #endif
                    386: #ifdef HAVE_trunctfdf2
                    387:       if (HAVE_trunctfdf2 && from_mode == TFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    388:        {
                    389:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunctfdf2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    390:          return;
                    391:        }
                    392: #endif
                    393: 
                    394:       if (from_mode == SFmode && to_mode == DFmode)
                    395:        libcall = extendsfdf2_libfunc;
                    396:       else if (from_mode == DFmode && to_mode == SFmode)
                    397:        libcall = truncdfsf2_libfunc;
                    398:       else
                    399:        /* This conversion is not implemented yet.  There aren't any TFmode
                    400:           library calls.  */
                    401:        abort ();
                    402: 
1.1.1.2 ! root      403:       emit_library_call (libcall, 1, to_mode, 1, from, from_mode);
1.1       root      404:       emit_move_insn (to, hard_libcall_value (to_mode));
                    405:       return;
                    406:     }
                    407: 
                    408:   /* Now both modes are integers.  */
                    409: 
                    410:   /* Handle expanding beyond a word.  */
                    411:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode)
                    412:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
                    413:     {
                    414:       rtx insns;
                    415:       rtx lowpart;
                    416:       rtx fill_value;
                    417:       rtx lowfrom;
                    418:       int i;
                    419:       enum machine_mode lowpart_mode;
                    420:       int nwords = CEIL (GET_MODE_SIZE (to_mode), UNITS_PER_WORD);
                    421: 
                    422:       /* Try converting directly if the insn is supported.  */
                    423:       if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
                    424:          != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    425:        {
                    426:          emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
                    427:          return;
                    428:        }
                    429:       /* Next, try converting via full word.  */
                    430:       else if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD
                    431:               && ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, word_mode, unsignedp))
                    432:                   != CODE_FOR_nothing))
                    433:        {
                    434:          convert_move (gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), from, unsignedp);
                    435:          emit_unop_insn (code, to,
                    436:                          gen_lowpart (word_mode, to), equiv_code);
                    437:          return;
                    438:        }
                    439: 
                    440:       /* No special multiword conversion insn; do it by hand.  */
                    441:       start_sequence ();
                    442: 
                    443:       /* Get a copy of FROM widened to a word, if necessary.  */
                    444:       if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) < BITS_PER_WORD)
                    445:        lowpart_mode = word_mode;
                    446:       else
                    447:        lowpart_mode = from_mode;
                    448: 
                    449:       lowfrom = convert_to_mode (lowpart_mode, from, unsignedp);
                    450: 
                    451:       lowpart = gen_lowpart (lowpart_mode, to);
                    452:       emit_move_insn (lowpart, lowfrom);
                    453: 
                    454:       /* Compute the value to put in each remaining word.  */
                    455:       if (unsignedp)
                    456:        fill_value = const0_rtx;
                    457:       else
                    458:        {
                    459: #ifdef HAVE_slt
                    460:          if (HAVE_slt
                    461:              && insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_slt][0] == word_mode
                    462:              && STORE_FLAG_VALUE == -1)
                    463:            {
                    464:              emit_cmp_insn (lowfrom, const0_rtx, NE, 0, lowpart_mode, 0, 0);
                    465:              fill_value = gen_reg_rtx (word_mode);
                    466:              emit_insn (gen_slt (fill_value));
                    467:            }
                    468:          else
                    469: #endif
                    470:            {
                    471:              fill_value
                    472:                = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, lowpart_mode, lowfrom,
                    473:                                size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (lowpart_mode) - 1),
                    474:                                0, 0);
                    475:              fill_value = convert_to_mode (word_mode, fill_value, 1);
                    476:            }
                    477:        }
                    478: 
                    479:       /* Fill the remaining words.  */
                    480:       for (i = GET_MODE_SIZE (lowpart_mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD; i < nwords; i++)
                    481:        {
                    482:          int index = (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN ? nwords - i - 1 : i);
                    483:          rtx subword = operand_subword (to, index, 1, to_mode);
                    484: 
                    485:          if (subword == 0)
                    486:            abort ();
                    487: 
                    488:          if (fill_value != subword)
                    489:            emit_move_insn (subword, fill_value);
                    490:        }
                    491: 
                    492:       insns = get_insns ();
                    493:       end_sequence ();
                    494: 
                    495:       emit_no_conflict_block (insns, to, from, 0,
                    496:                              gen_rtx (equiv_code, to_mode, from));
                    497:       return;
                    498:     }
                    499: 
                    500:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode) > BITS_PER_WORD)
                    501:     {
                    502:       convert_move (to, gen_lowpart (word_mode, from), 0);
                    503:       return;
                    504:     }
                    505: 
                    506:   /* Handle pointer conversion */                      /* SPEE 900220 */
                    507:   if (to_mode == PSImode)
                    508:     {
                    509:       if (from_mode != SImode)
                    510:        from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
                    511: 
                    512: #ifdef HAVE_truncsipsi
                    513:       if (HAVE_truncsipsi)
                    514:        {
                    515:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsipsi, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    516:          return;
                    517:        }
                    518: #endif /* HAVE_truncsipsi */
                    519:       abort ();
                    520:     }
                    521: 
                    522:   if (from_mode == PSImode)
                    523:     {
                    524:       if (to_mode != SImode)
                    525:        {
                    526:          from = convert_to_mode (SImode, from, unsignedp);
                    527:          from_mode = SImode;
                    528:        }
                    529:       else
                    530:        {
                    531: #ifdef HAVE_extendpsisi
                    532:          if (HAVE_extendpsisi)
                    533:            {
                    534:              emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_extendpsisi, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    535:              return;
                    536:            }
                    537: #endif /* HAVE_extendpsisi */
                    538:          abort ();
                    539:        }
                    540:     }
                    541: 
                    542:   /* Now follow all the conversions between integers
                    543:      no more than a word long.  */
                    544: 
                    545:   /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode.  */
                    546:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode)
                    547:       && TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode),
                    548:                                GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    549:       && ((GET_CODE (from) == MEM
                    550:           && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (from)
                    551:           && ! mode_dependent_address_p (XEXP (from, 0)))
                    552:          || GET_CODE (from) == REG
                    553:          || GET_CODE (from) == SUBREG))
                    554:     {
                    555:       emit_move_insn (to, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
                    556:       return;
                    557:     }
                    558: 
                    559:   /* For truncation, usually we can just refer to FROM in a narrower mode.  */
                    560:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) > GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    561:     {
                    562:       /* Convert directly if that works.  */
                    563:       if ((code = can_extend_p (to_mode, from_mode, unsignedp))
                    564:          != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    565:        {
                    566:          emit_unop_insn (code, to, from, equiv_code);
                    567:          return;
                    568:        }
                    569:       else
                    570:        {
                    571:          enum machine_mode intermediate;
                    572: 
                    573:          /* Search for a mode to convert via.  */
                    574:          for (intermediate = from_mode; intermediate != VOIDmode;
                    575:               intermediate = GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (intermediate))
                    576:            if ((can_extend_p (to_mode, intermediate, unsignedp)
                    577:                 != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                    578:                && (can_extend_p (intermediate, from_mode, unsignedp)
                    579:                    != CODE_FOR_nothing))
                    580:              {
                    581:                convert_move (to, convert_to_mode (intermediate, from,
                    582:                                                   unsignedp), unsignedp);
                    583:                return;
                    584:              }
                    585: 
                    586:          /* No suitable intermediate mode.  */
                    587:          abort ();
                    588:        }
                    589:     }
                    590: 
                    591:   /* Support special truncate insns for certain modes.  */ 
                    592: 
                    593:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == SImode)
                    594:     {
                    595: #ifdef HAVE_truncdisi2
                    596:       if (HAVE_truncdisi2)
                    597:        {
                    598:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdisi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    599:          return;
                    600:        }
                    601: #endif
                    602:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    603:       return;
                    604:     }
                    605: 
                    606:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == HImode)
                    607:     {
                    608: #ifdef HAVE_truncdihi2
                    609:       if (HAVE_truncdihi2)
                    610:        {
                    611:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    612:          return;
                    613:        }
                    614: #endif
                    615:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    616:       return;
                    617:     }
                    618: 
                    619:   if (from_mode == DImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    620:     {
                    621: #ifdef HAVE_truncdiqi2
                    622:       if (HAVE_truncdiqi2)
                    623:        {
                    624:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncdiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    625:          return;
                    626:        }
                    627: #endif
                    628:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    629:       return;
                    630:     }
                    631: 
                    632:   if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == HImode)
                    633:     {
                    634: #ifdef HAVE_truncsihi2
                    635:       if (HAVE_truncsihi2)
                    636:        {
                    637:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsihi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    638:          return;
                    639:        }
                    640: #endif
                    641:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    642:       return;
                    643:     }
                    644: 
                    645:   if (from_mode == SImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    646:     {
                    647: #ifdef HAVE_truncsiqi2
                    648:       if (HAVE_truncsiqi2)
                    649:        {
                    650:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_truncsiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    651:          return;
                    652:        }
                    653: #endif
                    654:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    655:       return;
                    656:     }
                    657: 
                    658:   if (from_mode == HImode && to_mode == QImode)
                    659:     {
                    660: #ifdef HAVE_trunchiqi2
                    661:       if (HAVE_trunchiqi2)
                    662:        {
                    663:          emit_unop_insn (CODE_FOR_trunchiqi2, to, from, UNKNOWN);
                    664:          return;
                    665:        }
                    666: #endif
                    667:       convert_move (to, force_reg (from_mode, from), unsignedp);
                    668:       return;
                    669:     }
                    670: 
                    671:   /* Handle truncation of volatile memrefs, and so on;
                    672:      the things that couldn't be truncated directly,
                    673:      and for which there was no special instruction.  */
                    674:   if (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (to_mode) < GET_MODE_BITSIZE (from_mode))
                    675:     {
                    676:       rtx temp = force_reg (to_mode, gen_lowpart (to_mode, from));
                    677:       emit_move_insn (to, temp);
                    678:       return;
                    679:     }
                    680: 
                    681:   /* Mode combination is not recognized.  */
                    682:   abort ();
                    683: }
                    684: 
                    685: /* Return an rtx for a value that would result
                    686:    from converting X to mode MODE.
                    687:    Both X and MODE may be floating, or both integer.
                    688:    UNSIGNEDP is nonzero if X is an unsigned value.
                    689:    This can be done by referring to a part of X in place
                    690:    or by copying to a new temporary with conversion.  */
                    691: 
                    692: rtx
                    693: convert_to_mode (mode, x, unsignedp)
                    694:      enum machine_mode mode;
                    695:      rtx x;
                    696:      int unsignedp;
                    697: {
                    698:   register rtx temp;
                    699: 
                    700:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 0);
                    701: 
                    702:   if (mode == GET_MODE (x))
                    703:     return x;
                    704: 
                    705:   /* There is one case that we must handle specially: If we are converting
                    706:      a CONST_INT into a mode whose size is twice HOST_BITS_PER_INT and
                    707:      we are to interpret the constant as unsigned, gen_lowpart will do
                    708:      the wrong if the constant appears negative.  What we want to do is
                    709:      make the high-order word of the constant zero, not all ones.  */
                    710: 
                    711:   if (unsignedp && GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                    712:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) == 2 * HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                    713:       && GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT && INTVAL (x) < 0)
                    714:     return immed_double_const (INTVAL (x), 0, mode);
                    715: 
                    716:   /* We can do this with a gen_lowpart if both desired and current modes
                    717:      are integer, and this is either a constant integer, a register, or a
                    718:      non-volatile MEM.  Except for the constant case, we must be narrowing
                    719:      the operand.  */
                    720: 
                    721:   if (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_INT
                    722:       || (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT
                    723:          && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) == MODE_INT
                    724:          && (GET_CODE (x) == CONST_DOUBLE
                    725:              || (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) <= GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (x))
                    726:                  && ((GET_CODE (x) == MEM && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (x))
                    727:                      || GET_CODE (x) == REG)))))
                    728:     return gen_lowpart (mode, x);
                    729: 
                    730:   temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                    731:   convert_move (temp, x, unsignedp);
                    732:   return temp;
                    733: }
                    734: 
                    735: /* Generate several move instructions to copy LEN bytes
                    736:    from block FROM to block TO.  (These are MEM rtx's with BLKmode).
                    737:    The caller must pass FROM and TO
                    738:     through protect_from_queue before calling.
                    739:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.  */
                    740: 
                    741: struct move_by_pieces
                    742: {
                    743:   rtx to;
                    744:   rtx to_addr;
                    745:   int autinc_to;
                    746:   int explicit_inc_to;
                    747:   rtx from;
                    748:   rtx from_addr;
                    749:   int autinc_from;
                    750:   int explicit_inc_from;
                    751:   int len;
                    752:   int offset;
                    753:   int reverse;
                    754: };
                    755: 
                    756: static void move_by_pieces_1 ();
                    757: static int move_by_pieces_ninsns ();
                    758: 
                    759: static void
                    760: move_by_pieces (to, from, len, align)
                    761:      rtx to, from;
                    762:      int len, align;
                    763: {
                    764:   struct move_by_pieces data;
                    765:   rtx to_addr = XEXP (to, 0), from_addr = XEXP (from, 0);
1.1.1.2 ! root      766:   int max_size = MOVE_MAX + 1;
1.1       root      767: 
                    768:   data.offset = 0;
                    769:   data.to_addr = to_addr;
                    770:   data.from_addr = from_addr;
                    771:   data.to = to;
                    772:   data.from = from;
                    773:   data.autinc_to
                    774:     = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC
                    775:        || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_INC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    776:   data.autinc_from
                    777:     = (GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_INC || GET_CODE (from_addr) == PRE_DEC
                    778:        || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_INC
                    779:        || GET_CODE (from_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    780: 
                    781:   data.explicit_inc_from = 0;
                    782:   data.explicit_inc_to = 0;
                    783:   data.reverse
                    784:     = (GET_CODE (to_addr) == PRE_DEC || GET_CODE (to_addr) == POST_DEC);
                    785:   if (data.reverse) data.offset = len;
                    786:   data.len = len;
                    787: 
                    788:   /* If copying requires more than two move insns,
                    789:      copy addresses to registers (to make displacements shorter)
                    790:      and use post-increment if available.  */
                    791:   if (!(data.autinc_from && data.autinc_to)
                    792:       && move_by_pieces_ninsns (len, align) > 2)
                    793:     {
                    794: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    795:       if (data.reverse && ! data.autinc_from)
                    796:        {
                    797:          data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (from_addr, len));
                    798:          data.autinc_from = 1;
                    799:          data.explicit_inc_from = -1;
                    800:        }
                    801: #endif
                    802: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    803:       if (! data.autinc_from)
                    804:        {
                    805:          data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
                    806:          data.autinc_from = 1;
                    807:          data.explicit_inc_from = 1;
                    808:        }
                    809: #endif
                    810:       if (!data.autinc_from && CONSTANT_P (from_addr))
                    811:        data.from_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (from_addr);
                    812: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    813:       if (data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
                    814:        {
                    815:          data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (plus_constant (to_addr, len));
                    816:          data.autinc_to = 1;
                    817:          data.explicit_inc_to = -1;
                    818:        }
                    819: #endif
                    820: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    821:       if (! data.reverse && ! data.autinc_to)
                    822:        {
                    823:          data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
                    824:          data.autinc_to = 1;
                    825:          data.explicit_inc_to = 1;
                    826:        }
                    827: #endif
                    828:       if (!data.autinc_to && CONSTANT_P (to_addr))
                    829:        data.to_addr = copy_addr_to_reg (to_addr);
                    830:     }
                    831: 
1.1.1.2 ! root      832:   if (! (STRICT_ALIGNMENT || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
        !           833:       || align > MOVE_MAX || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT)
1.1       root      834:     align = MOVE_MAX;
                    835: 
                    836:   /* First move what we can in the largest integer mode, then go to
                    837:      successively smaller modes.  */
                    838: 
                    839:   while (max_size > 1)
                    840:     {
                    841:       enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
                    842:       enum insn_code icode;
                    843: 
                    844:       for (tmode = VOIDmode; (int) tmode < (int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE;
                    845:           tmode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) tmode + 1))
                    846:        if (GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode) == MODE_INT
                    847:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
                    848:          mode = tmode;
                    849: 
                    850:       if (mode == VOIDmode)
                    851:        break;
                    852: 
                    853:       icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                    854:       if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
                    855:          && align >= MIN (BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                    856:                           GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
                    857:        move_by_pieces_1 (GEN_FCN (icode), mode, &data);
                    858: 
                    859:       max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    860:     }
                    861: 
                    862:   /* The code above should have handled everything.  */
                    863:   if (data.len != 0)
                    864:     abort ();
                    865: }
                    866: 
                    867: /* Return number of insns required to move L bytes by pieces.
                    868:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.  */
                    869: 
                    870: static int
                    871: move_by_pieces_ninsns (l, align)
                    872:      unsigned int l;
                    873:      int align;
                    874: {
                    875:   register int n_insns = 0;
1.1.1.2 ! root      876:   int max_size = MOVE_MAX + 1;
1.1       root      877: 
1.1.1.2 ! root      878:   if (! (STRICT_ALIGNMENT || SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
        !           879:       || align > MOVE_MAX || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT)
1.1       root      880:     align = MOVE_MAX;
                    881: 
                    882:   while (max_size > 1)
                    883:     {
                    884:       enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode, tmode;
                    885:       enum insn_code icode;
                    886: 
                    887:       for (tmode = VOIDmode; (int) tmode < (int) MAX_MACHINE_MODE;
                    888:           tmode = (enum machine_mode) ((int) tmode + 1))
                    889:        if (GET_MODE_CLASS (tmode) == MODE_INT
                    890:            && GET_MODE_SIZE (tmode) < max_size)
                    891:          mode = tmode;
                    892: 
                    893:       if (mode == VOIDmode)
                    894:        break;
                    895: 
                    896:       icode = mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                    897:       if (icode != CODE_FOR_nothing
                    898:          && align >= MIN (BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                    899:                           GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)))
                    900:        n_insns += l / GET_MODE_SIZE (mode), l %= GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    901: 
                    902:       max_size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    903:     }
                    904: 
                    905:   return n_insns;
                    906: }
                    907: 
                    908: /* Subroutine of move_by_pieces.  Move as many bytes as appropriate
                    909:    with move instructions for mode MODE.  GENFUN is the gen_... function
                    910:    to make a move insn for that mode.  DATA has all the other info.  */
                    911: 
                    912: static void
                    913: move_by_pieces_1 (genfun, mode, data)
                    914:      rtx (*genfun) ();
                    915:      enum machine_mode mode;
                    916:      struct move_by_pieces *data;
                    917: {
                    918:   register int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode);
                    919:   register rtx to1, from1;
                    920: 
                    921:   while (data->len >= size)
                    922:     {
                    923:       if (data->reverse) data->offset -= size;
                    924: 
                    925:       to1 = (data->autinc_to
                    926:             ? gen_rtx (MEM, mode, data->to_addr)
                    927:             : change_address (data->to, mode,
                    928:                               plus_constant (data->to_addr, data->offset)));
                    929:       from1 =
                    930:        (data->autinc_from
                    931:         ? gen_rtx (MEM, mode, data->from_addr)
                    932:         : change_address (data->from, mode,
                    933:                           plus_constant (data->from_addr, data->offset)));
                    934: 
                    935: #ifdef HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
                    936:       if (data->explicit_inc_to < 0)
1.1.1.2 ! root      937:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
        !           938:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, -size)));
1.1       root      939:       if (data->explicit_inc_from < 0)
1.1.1.2 ! root      940:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
        !           941:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, -size)));
1.1       root      942: #endif
                    943: 
                    944:       emit_insn ((*genfun) (to1, from1));
                    945: #ifdef HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
                    946:       if (data->explicit_inc_to > 0)
                    947:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->to_addr,
                    948:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    949:       if (data->explicit_inc_from > 0)
                    950:        emit_insn (gen_add2_insn (data->from_addr,
                    951:                                  gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size)));
                    952: #endif
                    953: 
                    954:       if (! data->reverse) data->offset += size;
                    955: 
                    956:       data->len -= size;
                    957:     }
                    958: }
                    959: 
                    960: /* Emit code to move a block Y to a block X.
                    961:    This may be done with string-move instructions,
                    962:    with multiple scalar move instructions, or with a library call.
                    963: 
                    964:    Both X and Y must be MEM rtx's (perhaps inside VOLATILE)
                    965:    with mode BLKmode.
                    966:    SIZE is an rtx that says how long they are.
                    967:    ALIGN is the maximum alignment we can assume they have,
                    968:    measured in bytes.  */
                    969: 
                    970: void
                    971: emit_block_move (x, y, size, align)
                    972:      rtx x, y;
                    973:      rtx size;
                    974:      int align;
                    975: {
                    976:   if (GET_MODE (x) != BLKmode)
                    977:     abort ();
                    978: 
                    979:   if (GET_MODE (y) != BLKmode)
                    980:     abort ();
                    981: 
                    982:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
                    983:   y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
                    984: 
                    985:   if (GET_CODE (x) != MEM)
                    986:     abort ();
                    987:   if (GET_CODE (y) != MEM)
                    988:     abort ();
                    989:   if (size == 0)
                    990:     abort ();
                    991: 
                    992:   if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                    993:       && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size), align)
                    994:          < MOVE_RATIO))
                    995:     move_by_pieces (x, y, INTVAL (size), align);
                    996:   else
                    997:     {
                    998:       /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
                    999:         including more than one in the machine description unless
                   1000:         the more limited one has some advantage.  */
                   1001: #ifdef HAVE_movstrqi
                   1002:       if (HAVE_movstrqi
                   1003:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1004:          && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1005:              < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (QImode) - 1))))
                   1006:        {
                   1007:          rtx insn = gen_movstrqi (x, y, size,
                   1008:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1009:          if (insn)
                   1010:            {
                   1011:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1012:              return;
                   1013:            }
                   1014:        }
                   1015: #endif
                   1016: #ifdef HAVE_movstrhi
                   1017:       if (HAVE_movstrhi
                   1018:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1019:          && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1020:              < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (HImode) - 1))))
                   1021:        {
                   1022:          rtx insn = gen_movstrhi (x, y, size,
                   1023:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1024:          if (insn)
                   1025:            {
                   1026:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1027:              return;
                   1028:            }
                   1029:        }
                   1030: #endif
                   1031: #ifdef HAVE_movstrsi
                   1032:       if (HAVE_movstrsi)
                   1033:        {
                   1034:          rtx insn = gen_movstrsi (x, y, size,
                   1035:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1036:          if (insn)
                   1037:            {
                   1038:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1039:              return;
                   1040:            }
                   1041:        }
                   1042: #endif
                   1043: #ifdef HAVE_movstrdi
                   1044:       if (HAVE_movstrdi)
                   1045:        {
                   1046:          rtx insn = gen_movstrdi (x, y, size,
                   1047:                                   gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align));
                   1048:          if (insn)
                   1049:            {
                   1050:              emit_insn (insn);
                   1051:              return;
                   1052:            }
                   1053:        }
                   1054: #endif
                   1055: 
                   1056: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1.1.1.2 ! root     1057:       emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1058:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (x, 0), Pmode,
                   1059:                         XEXP (y, 0), Pmode,
                   1060:                         size, Pmode);
                   1061: #else
1.1.1.2 ! root     1062:       emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1063:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (y, 0), Pmode,
                   1064:                         XEXP (x, 0), Pmode,
                   1065:                         size, Pmode);
                   1066: #endif
                   1067:     }
                   1068: }
                   1069: 
                   1070: /* Copy all or part of a value X into registers starting at REGNO.
                   1071:    The number of registers to be filled is NREGS.  */
                   1072: 
                   1073: void
                   1074: move_block_to_reg (regno, x, nregs, mode)
                   1075:      int regno;
                   1076:      rtx x;
                   1077:      int nregs;
                   1078:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1079: {
                   1080:   int i;
                   1081:   rtx pat, last;
                   1082: 
                   1083:   if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
                   1084:     x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
                   1085: 
                   1086:   /* See if the machine can do this with a load multiple insn.  */
                   1087: #ifdef HAVE_load_multiple
                   1088:   last = get_last_insn ();
                   1089:   pat = gen_load_multiple (gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno), x,
                   1090:                           gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, nregs));
                   1091:   if (pat)
                   1092:     {
                   1093:       emit_insn (pat);
                   1094:       return;
                   1095:     }
                   1096:   else
                   1097:     delete_insns_since (last);
                   1098: #endif
                   1099: 
                   1100:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1101:     emit_move_insn (gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i),
                   1102:                    operand_subword_force (x, i, mode));
                   1103: }
                   1104: 
                   1105: /* Copy all or part of a BLKmode value X out of registers starting at REGNO.
                   1106:    The number of registers to be filled is NREGS.  */
                   1107: 
                   1108: void
                   1109: move_block_from_reg (regno, x, nregs)
                   1110:      int regno;
                   1111:      rtx x;
                   1112:      int nregs;
                   1113: {
                   1114:   int i;
                   1115:   rtx pat, last;
                   1116: 
                   1117:   /* See if the machine can do this with a store multiple insn.  */
                   1118: #ifdef HAVE_store_multiple
                   1119:   last = get_last_insn ();
                   1120:   pat = gen_store_multiple (x, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno),
                   1121:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, nregs));
                   1122:   if (pat)
                   1123:     {
                   1124:       emit_insn (pat);
                   1125:       return;
                   1126:     }
                   1127:   else
                   1128:     delete_insns_since (last);
                   1129: #endif
                   1130: 
                   1131:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1132:     {
                   1133:       rtx tem = operand_subword (x, i, 1, BLKmode);
                   1134: 
                   1135:       if (tem == 0)
                   1136:        abort ();
                   1137: 
                   1138:       emit_move_insn (tem, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i));
                   1139:     }
                   1140: }
                   1141: 
                   1142: /* Mark NREGS consecutive regs, starting at REGNO, as being live now.  */
                   1143: 
                   1144: void
                   1145: use_regs (regno, nregs)
                   1146:      int regno;
                   1147:      int nregs;
                   1148: {
                   1149:   int i;
                   1150: 
                   1151:   for (i = 0; i < nregs; i++)
                   1152:     emit_insn (gen_rtx (USE, VOIDmode, gen_rtx (REG, word_mode, regno + i)));
                   1153: }
                   1154: 
                   1155: /* Write zeros through the storage of OBJECT.
                   1156:    If OBJECT has BLKmode, SIZE is its length in bytes.  */
                   1157: 
                   1158: void
                   1159: clear_storage (object, size)
                   1160:      rtx object;
                   1161:      int size;
                   1162: {
                   1163:   if (GET_MODE (object) == BLKmode)
                   1164:     {
                   1165: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1.1.1.2 ! root     1166:       emit_library_call (memset_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1167:                         VOIDmode, 3,
                   1168:                         XEXP (object, 0), Pmode, const0_rtx, Pmode,
                   1169:                         gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size), Pmode);
                   1170: #else
1.1.1.2 ! root     1171:       emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1172:                         VOIDmode, 2,
                   1173:                         XEXP (object, 0), Pmode,
                   1174:                         gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, size), Pmode);
                   1175: #endif
                   1176:     }
                   1177:   else
                   1178:     emit_move_insn (object, const0_rtx);
                   1179: }
                   1180: 
                   1181: /* Generate code to copy Y into X.
                   1182:    Both Y and X must have the same mode, except that
                   1183:    Y can be a constant with VOIDmode.
                   1184:    This mode cannot be BLKmode; use emit_block_move for that.
                   1185: 
                   1186:    Return the last instruction emitted.  */
                   1187: 
                   1188: rtx
                   1189: emit_move_insn (x, y)
                   1190:      rtx x, y;
                   1191: {
                   1192:   enum machine_mode mode = GET_MODE (x);
                   1193:   int i;
                   1194: 
                   1195:   x = protect_from_queue (x, 1);
                   1196:   y = protect_from_queue (y, 0);
                   1197: 
                   1198:   if (mode == BLKmode || (GET_MODE (y) != mode && GET_MODE (y) != VOIDmode))
                   1199:     abort ();
                   1200: 
                   1201:   if (CONSTANT_P (y) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (y))
                   1202:     y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
                   1203: 
                   1204:   /* If X or Y are memory references, verify that their addresses are valid
                   1205:      for the machine.  */
                   1206:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   1207:       && ((! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (x), XEXP (x, 0))
                   1208:           && ! push_operand (x, GET_MODE (x)))
                   1209:          || (flag_force_addr
                   1210:              && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (x, 0)))))
                   1211:     x = change_address (x, VOIDmode, XEXP (x, 0));
                   1212: 
                   1213:   if (GET_CODE (y) == MEM
                   1214:       && (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (y), XEXP (y, 0))
                   1215:          || (flag_force_addr
                   1216:              && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (y, 0)))))
                   1217:     y = change_address (y, VOIDmode, XEXP (y, 0));
                   1218: 
                   1219:   if (mode == BLKmode)
                   1220:     abort ();
                   1221: 
                   1222:   if (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   1223:     return
                   1224:       emit_insn (GEN_FCN (mov_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code) (x, y));
                   1225: 
                   1226:   /* This will handle any multi-word mode that lacks a move_insn pattern.
                   1227:      However, you will get better code if you define such patterns,
                   1228:      even if they must turn into multiple assembler instructions.  */
                   1229:   else if (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) >= UNITS_PER_WORD)
                   1230:     {
                   1231:       rtx last_insn = 0;
                   1232: 
                   1233:       for (i = 0;
                   1234:           i < (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode)  + (UNITS_PER_WORD - 1)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1235:           i++)
                   1236:        {
                   1237:          rtx xpart = operand_subword (x, i, 1, mode);
                   1238:          rtx ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
                   1239: 
                   1240:          /* If we can't get a part of Y, put Y into memory if it is a
                   1241:             constant.  Otherwise, force it into a register.  If we still
                   1242:             can't get a part of Y, abort.  */
                   1243:          if (ypart == 0 && CONSTANT_P (y))
                   1244:            {
                   1245:              y = force_const_mem (mode, y);
                   1246:              ypart = operand_subword (y, i, 1, mode);
                   1247:            }
                   1248:          else if (ypart == 0)
                   1249:            ypart = operand_subword_force (y, i, mode);
                   1250: 
                   1251:          if (xpart == 0 || ypart == 0)
                   1252:            abort ();
                   1253: 
                   1254:          last_insn = emit_move_insn (xpart, ypart);
                   1255:        }
                   1256:       return last_insn;
                   1257:     }
                   1258:   else
                   1259:     abort ();
                   1260: }
                   1261: 
                   1262: /* Pushing data onto the stack.  */
                   1263: 
                   1264: /* Push a block of length SIZE (perhaps variable)
                   1265:    and return an rtx to address the beginning of the block.
                   1266:    Note that it is not possible for the value returned to be a QUEUED.
                   1267:    The value may be virtual_outgoing_args_rtx.
                   1268: 
                   1269:    EXTRA is the number of bytes of padding to push in addition to SIZE.
                   1270:    BELOW nonzero means this padding comes at low addresses;
                   1271:    otherwise, the padding comes at high addresses.  */
                   1272: 
                   1273: rtx
                   1274: push_block (size, extra, below)
                   1275:      rtx size;
                   1276:      int extra, below;
                   1277: {
                   1278:   register rtx temp;
                   1279:   if (CONSTANT_P (size))
                   1280:     anti_adjust_stack (plus_constant (size, extra));
                   1281:   else if (GET_CODE (size) == REG && extra == 0)
                   1282:     anti_adjust_stack (size);
                   1283:   else
                   1284:     {
                   1285:       rtx temp = copy_to_mode_reg (Pmode, size);
                   1286:       if (extra != 0)
                   1287:        temp = expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab,
                   1288:                             temp,
                   1289:                             gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra),
                   1290:                             temp, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   1291:       anti_adjust_stack (temp);
                   1292:     }
                   1293: 
                   1294: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1295:   temp = virtual_outgoing_args_rtx;
                   1296:   if (extra != 0 && below)
                   1297:     temp = plus_constant (temp, extra);
                   1298: #else
                   1299:   if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
                   1300:     temp = plus_constant (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1301:                          - INTVAL (size) - (below ? 0 : extra));
                   1302:   else if (extra != 0 && !below)
                   1303:     temp = gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1304:                    negate_rtx (Pmode, plus_constant (size, extra)));
                   1305:   else
                   1306:     temp = gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, virtual_outgoing_args_rtx,
                   1307:                    negate_rtx (Pmode, size));
                   1308: #endif
                   1309: 
                   1310:   return memory_address (GET_CLASS_NARROWEST_MODE (MODE_INT), temp);
                   1311: }
                   1312: 
                   1313: static rtx
                   1314: gen_push_operand ()
                   1315: {
                   1316:   return gen_rtx (STACK_PUSH_CODE, Pmode, stack_pointer_rtx);
                   1317: }
                   1318: 
                   1319: /* Generate code to push X onto the stack, assuming it has mode MODE and
                   1320:    type TYPE.
                   1321:    MODE is redundant except when X is a CONST_INT (since they don't
                   1322:    carry mode info).
                   1323:    SIZE is an rtx for the size of data to be copied (in bytes),
                   1324:    needed only if X is BLKmode.
                   1325: 
                   1326:    ALIGN (in bytes) is maximum alignment we can assume.
                   1327: 
                   1328:    If PARTIAL is nonzero, then copy that many of the first words
                   1329:    of X into registers starting with REG, and push the rest of X.
                   1330:    The amount of space pushed is decreased by PARTIAL words,
                   1331:    rounded *down* to a multiple of PARM_BOUNDARY.
                   1332:    REG must be a hard register in this case.
                   1333: 
                   1334:    EXTRA is the amount in bytes of extra space to leave next to this arg.
                   1335:    This is ignored if an argument block has already been allocted.
                   1336: 
                   1337:    On a machine that lacks real push insns, ARGS_ADDR is the address of
                   1338:    the bottom of the argument block for this call.  We use indexing off there
                   1339:    to store the arg.  On machines with push insns, ARGS_ADDR is 0 when a
                   1340:    argument block has not been preallocated.
                   1341: 
                   1342:    ARGS_SO_FAR is the size of args previously pushed for this call.  */
                   1343: 
                   1344: void
                   1345: emit_push_insn (x, mode, type, size, align, partial, reg, extra,
                   1346:                args_addr, args_so_far)
                   1347:      register rtx x;
                   1348:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   1349:      tree type;
                   1350:      rtx size;
                   1351:      int align;
                   1352:      int partial;
                   1353:      rtx reg;
                   1354:      int extra;
                   1355:      rtx args_addr;
                   1356:      rtx args_so_far;
                   1357: {
                   1358:   rtx xinner;
                   1359:   enum direction stack_direction
                   1360: #ifdef STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
                   1361:     = downward;
                   1362: #else
                   1363:     = upward;
                   1364: #endif
                   1365: 
                   1366:   /* Decide where to pad the argument: `downward' for below,
                   1367:      `upward' for above, or `none' for don't pad it.
                   1368:      Default is below for small data on big-endian machines; else above.  */
                   1369:   enum direction where_pad = FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (mode, type);
                   1370: 
                   1371:   /* Invert direction if stack is post-update.  */
                   1372:   if (STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_INC || STACK_PUSH_CODE == POST_DEC)
                   1373:     if (where_pad != none)
                   1374:       where_pad = (where_pad == downward ? upward : downward);
                   1375: 
                   1376:   xinner = x = protect_from_queue (x, 0);
                   1377: 
                   1378:   if (mode == BLKmode)
                   1379:     {
                   1380:       /* Copy a block into the stack, entirely or partially.  */
                   1381: 
                   1382:       register rtx temp;
                   1383:       int used = partial * UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1384:       int offset = used % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   1385:       int skip;
                   1386:       
                   1387:       if (size == 0)
                   1388:        abort ();
                   1389: 
                   1390:       used -= offset;
                   1391: 
                   1392:       /* USED is now the # of bytes we need not copy to the stack
                   1393:         because registers will take care of them.  */
                   1394: 
                   1395:       if (partial != 0)
                   1396:        xinner = change_address (xinner, BLKmode,
                   1397:                                 plus_constant (XEXP (xinner, 0), used));
                   1398: 
                   1399:       /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
                   1400:         skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
                   1401:         Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
                   1402:         by setting SKIP to 0.  */
                   1403: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1404:       skip = 0;
                   1405: #else
                   1406:       skip = used;
                   1407: #endif
                   1408: 
                   1409: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1410:       /* Do it with several push insns if that doesn't take lots of insns
                   1411:         and if there is no difficulty with push insns that skip bytes
                   1412:         on the stack for alignment purposes.  */
                   1413:       if (args_addr == 0
                   1414:          && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1415:          && skip == 0
                   1416:          && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size) - used, align)
                   1417:              < MOVE_RATIO)
                   1418:          /* Here we avoid the case of a structure whose weak alignment
                   1419:             forces many pushes of a small amount of data,
                   1420:             and such small pushes do rounding that causes trouble.  */
1.1.1.2 ! root     1421:          && ((! STRICT_ALIGNMENT && ! SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS)
        !          1422:              || align >= BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT / BITS_PER_UNIT
1.1       root     1423:              || PUSH_ROUNDING (align) == align)
                   1424:          && PUSH_ROUNDING (INTVAL (size)) == INTVAL (size))
                   1425:        {
                   1426:          /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1427:             or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1428:             But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1429:          if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1430:              && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1431:            anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1432: 
                   1433:          move_by_pieces (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, gen_push_operand ()), xinner,
                   1434:                          INTVAL (size) - used, align);
                   1435:        }
                   1436:       else
                   1437: #endif /* PUSH_ROUNDING */
                   1438:        {
                   1439:          /* Otherwise make space on the stack and copy the data
                   1440:             to the address of that space.  */
                   1441: 
                   1442:          /* Deduct words put into registers from the size we must copy.  */
                   1443:          if (partial != 0)
                   1444:            {
                   1445:              if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT)
                   1446:                size = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, INTVAL (size) - used);
                   1447:              else
                   1448:                size = expand_binop (GET_MODE (size), sub_optab, size,
                   1449:                                     gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, used),
                   1450:                                     0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   1451:            }
                   1452: 
                   1453:          /* Get the address of the stack space.
                   1454:             In this case, we do not deal with EXTRA separately.
                   1455:             A single stack adjust will do.  */
                   1456:          if (! args_addr)
                   1457:            {
                   1458:              temp = push_block (size, extra, where_pad == downward);
                   1459:              extra = 0;
                   1460:            }
                   1461:          else if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
                   1462:            temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
                   1463:                                   plus_constant (args_addr,
                   1464:                                                  skip + INTVAL (args_so_far)));
                   1465:          else
                   1466:            temp = memory_address (BLKmode,
                   1467:                                   plus_constant (gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode,
                   1468:                                                           args_addr, args_so_far),
                   1469:                                                  skip));
                   1470: 
                   1471:          /* TEMP is the address of the block.  Copy the data there.  */
                   1472:          if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1473:              && (move_by_pieces_ninsns ((unsigned) INTVAL (size), align)
                   1474:                  < MOVE_RATIO))
                   1475:            {
                   1476:              move_by_pieces (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp), xinner,
                   1477:                              INTVAL (size), align);
                   1478:              goto ret;
                   1479:            }
                   1480:          /* Try the most limited insn first, because there's no point
                   1481:             including more than one in the machine description unless
                   1482:             the more limited one has some advantage.  */
                   1483: #ifdef HAVE_movstrqi
                   1484:          if (HAVE_movstrqi
                   1485:              && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1486:              && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1487:                  < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (QImode) - 1))))
                   1488:            {
                   1489:              emit_insn (gen_movstrqi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1490:                                       xinner, size,
                   1491:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1492:              goto ret;
                   1493:            }
                   1494: #endif
                   1495: #ifdef HAVE_movstrhi
                   1496:          if (HAVE_movstrhi
                   1497:              && GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
                   1498:              && ((unsigned) INTVAL (size)
                   1499:                  < (1 << (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (HImode) - 1))))
                   1500:            {
                   1501:              emit_insn (gen_movstrhi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1502:                                       xinner, size,
                   1503:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1504:              goto ret;
                   1505:            }
                   1506: #endif
                   1507: #ifdef HAVE_movstrsi
                   1508:          if (HAVE_movstrsi)
                   1509:            {
                   1510:              emit_insn (gen_movstrsi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1511:                                       xinner, size,
                   1512:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1513:              goto ret;
                   1514:            }
                   1515: #endif
                   1516: #ifdef HAVE_movstrdi
                   1517:          if (HAVE_movstrdi)
                   1518:            {
                   1519:              emit_insn (gen_movstrdi (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode, temp),
                   1520:                                       xinner, size,
                   1521:                                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, align)));
                   1522:              goto ret;
                   1523:            }
                   1524: #endif
                   1525: 
                   1526: #ifndef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1527:          /* If the source is referenced relative to the stack pointer,
                   1528:             copy it to another register to stabilize it.  We do not need
                   1529:             to do this if we know that we won't be changing sp.  */
                   1530: 
                   1531:          if (reg_mentioned_p (virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx, temp)
                   1532:              || reg_mentioned_p (virtual_outgoing_args_rtx, temp))
                   1533:            temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   1534: #endif
                   1535: 
                   1536:          /* Make inhibit_defer_pop nonzero around the library call
                   1537:             to force it to pop the bcopy-arguments right away.  */
                   1538:          NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1539: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1.1.1.2 ! root     1540:          emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1541:                             VOIDmode, 3, temp, Pmode, XEXP (xinner, 0), Pmode,
                   1542:                             size, Pmode);
                   1543: #else
1.1.1.2 ! root     1544:          emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1545:                             VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (xinner, 0), Pmode, temp, Pmode,
                   1546:                             size, Pmode);
                   1547: #endif
                   1548:          OK_DEFER_POP;
                   1549:        }
                   1550:     }
                   1551:   else if (partial > 0)
                   1552:     {
                   1553:       /* Scalar partly in registers.  */
                   1554: 
                   1555:       int size = GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1556:       int i;
                   1557:       int not_stack;
                   1558:       /* # words of start of argument
                   1559:         that we must make space for but need not store.  */
                   1560:       int offset = partial % (PARM_BOUNDARY / BITS_PER_WORD);
                   1561:       int args_offset = INTVAL (args_so_far);
                   1562:       int skip;
                   1563: 
                   1564:       /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1565:         or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1566:         But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1567:       if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1568:          && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1569:        anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1570: 
                   1571:       /* If we make space by pushing it, we might as well push
                   1572:         the real data.  Otherwise, we can leave OFFSET nonzero
                   1573:         and leave the space uninitialized.  */
                   1574:       if (args_addr == 0)
                   1575:        offset = 0;
                   1576: 
                   1577:       /* Now NOT_STACK gets the number of words that we don't need to
                   1578:         allocate on the stack.  */
                   1579:       not_stack = partial - offset;
                   1580: 
                   1581:       /* If the partial register-part of the arg counts in its stack size,
                   1582:         skip the part of stack space corresponding to the registers.
                   1583:         Otherwise, start copying to the beginning of the stack space,
                   1584:         by setting SKIP to 0.  */
                   1585: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1586:       skip = 0;
                   1587: #else
                   1588:       skip = not_stack;
                   1589: #endif
                   1590: 
                   1591:       if (CONSTANT_P (x) && ! LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (x))
                   1592:        x = validize_mem (force_const_mem (mode, x));
                   1593: 
                   1594:       /* If X is a hard register in a non-integer mode, copy it into a pseudo;
                   1595:         SUBREGs of such registers are not allowed.  */
                   1596:       if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
                   1597:           && GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (x)) != MODE_INT))
                   1598:        x = copy_to_reg (x);
                   1599: 
                   1600:       /* Loop over all the words allocated on the stack for this arg.  */
                   1601:       /* We can do it by words, because any scalar bigger than a word
                   1602:         has a size a multiple of a word.  */
                   1603: #ifndef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1604:       for (i = not_stack; i < size; i++)
                   1605: #else
                   1606:       for (i = size - 1; i >= not_stack; i--)
                   1607: #endif
                   1608:        if (i >= not_stack + offset)
                   1609:          emit_push_insn (operand_subword_force (x, i, mode),
                   1610:                          word_mode, 0, 0, align, 0, 0, 0, args_addr,
                   1611:                          gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   1612:                                   args_offset + ((i - not_stack + skip)
                   1613:                                                  * UNITS_PER_WORD)));
                   1614:     }
                   1615:   else
                   1616:     {
                   1617:       rtx addr;
                   1618: 
                   1619:       /* Push padding now if padding above and stack grows down,
                   1620:         or if padding below and stack grows up.
                   1621:         But if space already allocated, this has already been done.  */
                   1622:       if (extra && args_addr == 0
                   1623:          && where_pad != none && where_pad != stack_direction)
                   1624:        anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1625: 
                   1626: #ifdef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1627:       if (args_addr == 0)
                   1628:        addr = gen_push_operand ();
                   1629:       else
                   1630: #endif
                   1631:        if (GET_CODE (args_so_far) == CONST_INT)
                   1632:          addr
                   1633:            = memory_address (mode,
                   1634:                              plus_constant (args_addr, INTVAL (args_so_far)));
                   1635:       else
                   1636:        addr = memory_address (mode, gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode, args_addr,
                   1637:                                              args_so_far));
                   1638: 
                   1639:       emit_move_insn (gen_rtx (MEM, mode, addr), x);
                   1640:     }
                   1641: 
                   1642:  ret:
                   1643:   /* If part should go in registers, copy that part
                   1644:      into the appropriate registers.  Do this now, at the end,
                   1645:      since mem-to-mem copies above may do function calls.  */
                   1646:   if (partial > 0)
                   1647:     move_block_to_reg (REGNO (reg), x, partial, mode);
                   1648: 
                   1649:   if (extra && args_addr == 0 && where_pad == stack_direction)
                   1650:     anti_adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, extra));
                   1651: }
                   1652: 
                   1653: /* Output a library call to function FUN (a SYMBOL_REF rtx)
                   1654:    (emitting the queue unless NO_QUEUE is nonzero),
                   1655:    for a value of mode OUTMODE,
                   1656:    with NARGS different arguments, passed as alternating rtx values
                   1657:    and machine_modes to convert them to.
                   1658:    The rtx values should have been passed through protect_from_queue already.
                   1659: 
                   1660:    NO_QUEUE will be true if and only if the library call is a `const' call
                   1661:    which will be enclosed in REG_LIBCALL/REG_RETVAL notes; it is equivalent
                   1662:    to the variable is_const in expand_call.  */
                   1663: 
                   1664: void
                   1665: emit_library_call (va_alist)
                   1666:      va_dcl
                   1667: {
                   1668:   va_list p;
                   1669:   struct args_size args_size;
                   1670:   register int argnum;
                   1671:   enum machine_mode outmode;
                   1672:   int nargs;
                   1673:   rtx fun;
                   1674:   rtx orgfun;
                   1675:   int inc;
                   1676:   int count;
                   1677:   rtx argblock = 0;
                   1678:   CUMULATIVE_ARGS args_so_far;
                   1679:   struct arg { rtx value; enum machine_mode mode; rtx reg; int partial;
                   1680:               struct args_size offset; struct args_size size; };
                   1681:   struct arg *argvec;
                   1682:   int old_inhibit_defer_pop = inhibit_defer_pop;
                   1683:   int no_queue = 0;
                   1684:   rtx use_insns;
                   1685: 
                   1686:   va_start (p);
                   1687:   orgfun = fun = va_arg (p, rtx);
                   1688:   no_queue = va_arg (p, int);
                   1689:   outmode = va_arg (p, enum machine_mode);
                   1690:   nargs = va_arg (p, int);
                   1691: 
                   1692:   /* Copy all the libcall-arguments out of the varargs data
                   1693:      and into a vector ARGVEC.
                   1694: 
                   1695:      Compute how to pass each argument.  We only support a very small subset
                   1696:      of the full argument passing conventions to limit complexity here since
                   1697:      library functions shouldn't have many args.  */
                   1698: 
                   1699:   argvec = (struct arg *) alloca (nargs * sizeof (struct arg));
                   1700: 
                   1701:   INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (args_so_far, (tree)0, fun);
                   1702: 
                   1703:   args_size.constant = 0;
                   1704:   args_size.var = 0;
                   1705: 
                   1706:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++)
                   1707:     {
                   1708:       rtx val = va_arg (p, rtx);
                   1709:       enum machine_mode mode = va_arg (p, enum machine_mode);
                   1710: 
                   1711:       /* We cannot convert the arg value to the mode the library wants here;
                   1712:         must do it earlier where we know the signedness of the arg.  */
                   1713:       if (mode == BLKmode
                   1714:          || (GET_MODE (val) != mode && GET_MODE (val) != VOIDmode))
                   1715:        abort ();
                   1716: 
                   1717:       /* On some machines, there's no way to pass a float to a library fcn.
                   1718:         Pass it as a double instead.  */
                   1719: #ifdef LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
                   1720:       if (LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE && mode == SFmode)
                   1721:        val = convert_to_mode (DFmode, val), mode = DFmode;
                   1722: #endif
                   1723: 
                   1724:       /* Make sure it is a reasonable operand for a move or push insn.  */
                   1725:       if (GET_CODE (val) != REG && GET_CODE (val) != MEM
                   1726:          && ! (CONSTANT_P (val) && LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (val)))
                   1727:        val = force_operand (val, 0);
                   1728: 
                   1729:       argvec[count].value = val;
                   1730:       argvec[count].mode = mode;
                   1731: 
                   1732: #ifdef FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
                   1733:       if (FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1))
                   1734:        abort ();
                   1735: #endif
                   1736: 
                   1737:       argvec[count].reg = FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1738:       if (argvec[count].reg && GET_CODE (argvec[count].reg) == EXPR_LIST)
                   1739:        abort ();
                   1740: #ifdef FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
                   1741:       argvec[count].partial
                   1742:        = FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1743: #else
                   1744:       argvec[count].partial = 0;
                   1745: #endif
                   1746: 
                   1747:       locate_and_pad_parm (mode, 0,
                   1748:                           argvec[count].reg && argvec[count].partial == 0,
                   1749:                           0, &args_size, &argvec[count].offset,
                   1750:                           &argvec[count].size);
                   1751: 
                   1752:       if (argvec[count].size.var)
                   1753:        abort ();
                   1754: 
                   1755: #ifndef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1756:       if (argvec[count].partial)
                   1757:        argvec[count].size.constant -= argvec[count].partial * UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   1758: #endif
                   1759: 
                   1760:       if (argvec[count].reg == 0 || argvec[count].partial != 0
                   1761: #ifdef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1762:          || 1
                   1763: #endif
                   1764:          )
                   1765:        args_size.constant += argvec[count].size.constant;
                   1766: 
                   1767: #ifdef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1768:       /* If this arg is actually passed on the stack, it might be
                   1769:         clobbering something we already put there (this library call might
                   1770:         be inside the evaluation of an argument to a function whose call
                   1771:         requires the stack).  This will only occur when the library call
                   1772:         has sufficient args to run out of argument registers.  Abort in
                   1773:         this case; if this ever occurs, code must be added to save and
                   1774:         restore the arg slot.  */
                   1775: 
                   1776:       if (argvec[count].reg == 0 || argvec[count].partial != 0)
                   1777:        abort ();
                   1778: #endif
                   1779: 
                   1780:       FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (args_so_far, mode, (tree)0, 1);
                   1781:     }
                   1782:   va_end (p);
                   1783: 
                   1784:   /* If this machine requires an external definition for library
                   1785:      functions, write one out.  */
                   1786:   assemble_external_libcall (fun);
                   1787: 
                   1788: #ifdef STACK_BOUNDARY
                   1789:   args_size.constant = (((args_size.constant + (STACK_BYTES - 1))
                   1790:                         / STACK_BYTES) * STACK_BYTES);
                   1791: #endif
                   1792: 
                   1793: #ifdef REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
                   1794:   args_size.constant = MAX (args_size.constant,
                   1795:                            REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE ((tree) 0));
                   1796: #endif
                   1797: 
                   1798: #ifdef ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
                   1799:   if (args_size.constant > current_function_outgoing_args_size)
                   1800:     current_function_outgoing_args_size = args_size.constant;
                   1801:   args_size.constant = 0;
                   1802: #endif
                   1803: 
                   1804: #ifndef PUSH_ROUNDING
                   1805:   argblock = push_block (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, args_size.constant),
                   1806:                         0, 0);
                   1807: #endif
                   1808: 
                   1809: #ifdef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1810:   inc = -1;
                   1811:   argnum = nargs - 1;
                   1812: #else
                   1813:   inc = 1;
                   1814:   argnum = 0;
                   1815: #endif
                   1816: 
                   1817:   /* Push the args that need to be pushed.  */
                   1818: 
                   1819:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++, argnum += inc)
                   1820:     {
                   1821:       register enum machine_mode mode = argvec[argnum].mode;
                   1822:       register rtx val = argvec[argnum].value;
                   1823:       rtx reg = argvec[argnum].reg;
                   1824:       int partial = argvec[argnum].partial;
                   1825: 
                   1826:       if (! (reg != 0 && partial == 0))
                   1827:        emit_push_insn (val, mode, 0, 0, 0, partial, reg, 0, argblock,
                   1828:                        gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   1829:                                 argvec[count].offset.constant));
                   1830:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1831:     }
                   1832: 
                   1833: #ifdef PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
                   1834:   argnum = nargs - 1;
                   1835: #else
                   1836:   argnum = 0;
                   1837: #endif
                   1838: 
                   1839:   /* Now load any reg parms into their regs.  */
                   1840: 
                   1841:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++, argnum += inc)
                   1842:     {
                   1843:       register enum machine_mode mode = argvec[argnum].mode;
                   1844:       register rtx val = argvec[argnum].value;
                   1845:       rtx reg = argvec[argnum].reg;
                   1846:       int partial = argvec[argnum].partial;
                   1847: 
                   1848:       if (reg != 0 && partial == 0)
                   1849:        emit_move_insn (reg, val);
                   1850:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1851:     }
                   1852: 
                   1853:   /* For version 1.37, try deleting this entirely.  */
                   1854:   if (! no_queue)
                   1855:     emit_queue ();
                   1856: 
                   1857:   /* Any regs containing parms remain in use through the call.  */
                   1858:   start_sequence ();
                   1859:   for (count = 0; count < nargs; count++)
                   1860:     if (argvec[count].reg != 0)
                   1861:       emit_insn (gen_rtx (USE, VOIDmode, argvec[count].reg));
                   1862: 
                   1863:   use_insns = get_insns ();
                   1864:   end_sequence ();
                   1865: 
                   1866:   fun = prepare_call_address (fun, 0, &use_insns);
                   1867: 
                   1868:   /* Don't allow popping to be deferred, since then
                   1869:      cse'ing of library calls could delete a call and leave the pop.  */
                   1870:   NO_DEFER_POP;
                   1871: 
                   1872:   /* We pass the old value of inhibit_defer_pop + 1 to emit_call_1, which
                   1873:      will set inhibit_defer_pop to that value.  */
                   1874: 
                   1875:   emit_call_1 (fun, get_identifier (XSTR (orgfun, 0)), args_size.constant, 0,
                   1876:               FUNCTION_ARG (args_so_far, VOIDmode, void_type_node, 1),
                   1877:               outmode != VOIDmode ? hard_libcall_value (outmode) : 0,
                   1878:               old_inhibit_defer_pop + 1, use_insns, no_queue);
                   1879: 
                   1880:   /* Now restore inhibit_defer_pop to its actual original value.  */
                   1881:   OK_DEFER_POP;
                   1882: }
                   1883: 
                   1884: /* Expand an assignment that stores the value of FROM into TO.
                   1885:    If WANT_VALUE is nonzero, return an rtx for the value of TO.
                   1886:    (This may contain a QUEUED rtx.)
                   1887:    Otherwise, the returned value is not meaningful.
                   1888: 
                   1889:    SUGGEST_REG is no longer actually used.
                   1890:    It used to mean, copy the value through a register
                   1891:    and return that register, if that is possible.
                   1892:    But now we do this if WANT_VALUE.
                   1893: 
                   1894:    If the value stored is a constant, we return the constant.  */
                   1895: 
                   1896: rtx
                   1897: expand_assignment (to, from, want_value, suggest_reg)
                   1898:      tree to, from;
                   1899:      int want_value;
                   1900:      int suggest_reg;
                   1901: {
                   1902:   register rtx to_rtx = 0;
                   1903:   rtx result;
                   1904: 
                   1905:   /* Don't crash if the lhs of the assignment was erroneous.  */
                   1906: 
                   1907:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == ERROR_MARK)
                   1908:     return expand_expr (from, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1909: 
                   1910:   /* Assignment of a structure component needs special treatment
                   1911:      if the structure component's rtx is not simply a MEM.
                   1912:      Assignment of an array element at a constant index
                   1913:      has the same problem.  */
                   1914: 
                   1915:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == COMPONENT_REF
                   1916:       || TREE_CODE (to) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   1917:       || (TREE_CODE (to) == ARRAY_REF
                   1918:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (to, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   1919:          && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (to))) == INTEGER_CST))
                   1920:     {
                   1921:       enum machine_mode mode1;
                   1922:       int bitsize;
                   1923:       int bitpos;
                   1924:       int unsignedp;
                   1925:       int volatilep = 0;
                   1926:       tree tem = get_inner_reference (to, &bitsize, &bitpos,
                   1927:                                      &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep);
                   1928: 
                   1929:       /* If we are going to use store_bit_field and extract_bit_field,
                   1930:         make sure to_rtx will be safe for multiple use.  */
                   1931: 
                   1932:       if (mode1 == VOIDmode && want_value)
                   1933:        tem = stabilize_reference (tem);
                   1934: 
                   1935:       to_rtx = expand_expr (tem, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1936:       if (volatilep)
                   1937:        {
                   1938:          if (GET_CODE (to_rtx) == MEM)
                   1939:            MEM_VOLATILE_P (to_rtx) = 1;
                   1940: #if 0  /* This was turned off because, when a field is volatile
                   1941:          in an object which is not volatile, the object may be in a register,
                   1942:          and then we would abort over here.  */
                   1943:          else
                   1944:            abort ();
                   1945: #endif
                   1946:        }
                   1947: 
                   1948:       result = store_field (to_rtx, bitsize, bitpos, mode1, from,
                   1949:                            (want_value
                   1950:                             /* Spurious cast makes HPUX compiler happy.  */
                   1951:                             ? (enum machine_mode) TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (to))
                   1952:                             : VOIDmode),
                   1953:                            unsignedp,
                   1954:                            /* Required alignment of containing datum.  */
                   1955:                            TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   1956:                            int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem)));
                   1957:       preserve_temp_slots (result);
                   1958:       free_temp_slots ();
                   1959: 
                   1960:       return result;
                   1961:     }
                   1962: 
                   1963:   /* Ordinary treatment.  Expand TO to get a REG or MEM rtx.
                   1964:      Don't re-expand if it was expanded already (in COMPONENT_REF case).  */
                   1965: 
                   1966:   if (to_rtx == 0)
                   1967:     to_rtx = expand_expr (to, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1968: 
                   1969:   /* In case we are returning the contents of an object which overlaps
                   1970:      the place the value is being stored, use a safe function when copying
                   1971:      a value through a pointer into a structure value return block.  */
                   1972:   if (TREE_CODE (to) == RESULT_DECL && TREE_CODE (from) == INDIRECT_REF
                   1973:       && current_function_returns_struct
                   1974:       && !current_function_returns_pcc_struct)
                   1975:     {
                   1976:       rtx from_rtx = expand_expr (from, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   1977:       rtx size = expr_size (from);
                   1978: 
                   1979: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1.1.1.2 ! root     1980:       emit_library_call (memcpy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1981:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1982:                         XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1983:                         size, Pmode);
                   1984: #else
1.1.1.2 ! root     1985:       emit_library_call (bcopy_libfunc, 1,
1.1       root     1986:                         VOIDmode, 3, XEXP (from_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1987:                         XEXP (to_rtx, 0), Pmode,
                   1988:                         size, Pmode);
                   1989: #endif
                   1990: 
                   1991:       preserve_temp_slots (to_rtx);
                   1992:       free_temp_slots ();
                   1993:       return to_rtx;
                   1994:     }
                   1995: 
                   1996:   /* Compute FROM and store the value in the rtx we got.  */
                   1997: 
                   1998:   result = store_expr (from, to_rtx, want_value);
                   1999:   preserve_temp_slots (result);
                   2000:   free_temp_slots ();
                   2001:   return result;
                   2002: }
                   2003: 
                   2004: /* Generate code for computing expression EXP,
                   2005:    and storing the value into TARGET.
                   2006:    Returns TARGET or an equivalent value.
                   2007:    TARGET may contain a QUEUED rtx.
                   2008: 
                   2009:    If SUGGEST_REG is nonzero, copy the value through a register
                   2010:    and return that register, if that is possible.
                   2011: 
                   2012:    If the value stored is a constant, we return the constant.  */
                   2013: 
                   2014: rtx
                   2015: store_expr (exp, target, suggest_reg)
                   2016:      register tree exp;
                   2017:      register rtx target;
                   2018:      int suggest_reg;
                   2019: {
                   2020:   register rtx temp;
                   2021:   int dont_return_target = 0;
                   2022: 
                   2023:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPOUND_EXPR)
                   2024:     {
                   2025:       /* Perform first part of compound expression, then assign from second
                   2026:         part.  */
                   2027:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2028:       emit_queue ();
                   2029:       return store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, suggest_reg);
                   2030:     }
                   2031:   else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COND_EXPR && GET_MODE (target) == BLKmode)
                   2032:     {
                   2033:       /* For conditional expression, get safe form of the target.  Then
                   2034:         test the condition, doing the appropriate assignment on either
                   2035:         side.  This avoids the creation of unnecessary temporaries.
                   2036:         For non-BLKmode, it is more efficient not to do this.  */
                   2037: 
                   2038:       rtx lab1 = gen_label_rtx (), lab2 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   2039: 
                   2040:       emit_queue ();
                   2041:       target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
                   2042: 
                   2043:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   2044:       jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), lab1);
                   2045:       store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, suggest_reg);
                   2046:       emit_queue ();
                   2047:       emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (lab2));
                   2048:       emit_barrier ();
                   2049:       emit_label (lab1);
                   2050:       store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), target, suggest_reg);
                   2051:       emit_queue ();
                   2052:       emit_label (lab2);
                   2053:       OK_DEFER_POP;
                   2054:       return target;
                   2055:     }
                   2056:   else if (suggest_reg && GET_CODE (target) == MEM
                   2057:           && GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode)
                   2058:     /* If target is in memory and caller wants value in a register instead,
                   2059:        arrange that.  Pass TARGET as target for expand_expr so that,
                   2060:        if EXP is another assignment, SUGGEST_REG will be nonzero for it.
                   2061:        We know expand_expr will not use the target in that case.  */
                   2062:     {
                   2063:       temp = expand_expr (exp, cse_not_expected ? 0 : target,
                   2064:                          GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2065:       if (GET_MODE (temp) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   2066:        temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   2067:       dont_return_target = 1;
                   2068:     }
                   2069:   else if (queued_subexp_p (target))
                   2070:     /* If target contains a postincrement, it is not safe
                   2071:        to use as the returned value.  It would access the wrong
                   2072:        place by the time the queued increment gets output.
                   2073:        So copy the value through a temporary and use that temp
                   2074:        as the result.  */
                   2075:     {
                   2076:       if (GET_MODE (target) != BLKmode && GET_MODE (target) != VOIDmode)
                   2077:        {
                   2078:          /* Expand EXP into a new pseudo.  */
                   2079:          temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   2080:          temp = expand_expr (exp, temp, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2081:        }
                   2082:       else
                   2083:        temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2084:       dont_return_target = 1;
                   2085:     }
                   2086:   else
                   2087:     {
                   2088:       temp = expand_expr (exp, target, GET_MODE (target), 0);
                   2089:       /* DO return TARGET if it's a specified hardware register.
                   2090:         expand_return relies on this.  */
                   2091:       if (!(target && GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   2092:            && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2093:          && CONSTANT_P (temp))
                   2094:        dont_return_target = 1;
                   2095:     }
                   2096: 
                   2097:   /* If value was not generated in the target, store it there.
                   2098:      Convert the value to TARGET's type first if nec.  */
                   2099: 
                   2100:   if (temp != target && TREE_CODE (exp) != ERROR_MARK)
                   2101:     {
                   2102:       target = protect_from_queue (target, 1);
                   2103:       if (GET_MODE (temp) != GET_MODE (target)
                   2104:          && GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   2105:        {
                   2106:          int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2107:          if (dont_return_target)
                   2108:            {
                   2109:              /* In this case, we will return TEMP,
                   2110:                 so make sure it has the proper mode.
                   2111:                 But don't forget to store the value into TARGET.  */
                   2112:              temp = convert_to_mode (GET_MODE (target), temp, unsignedp);
                   2113:              emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2114:            }
                   2115:          else
                   2116:            convert_move (target, temp, unsignedp);
                   2117:        }
                   2118: 
                   2119:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode && TREE_CODE (exp) == STRING_CST)
                   2120:        {
                   2121:          /* Handle copying a string constant into an array.
                   2122:             The string constant may be shorter than the array.
                   2123:             So copy just the string's actual length, and clear the rest.  */
                   2124:          rtx size;
                   2125: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     2126:          /* Get the size of the data type of the string,
        !          2127:             which is actually the size of the target.  */
        !          2128:          size = expr_size (exp);
        !          2129:          if (GET_CODE (size) == CONST_INT
        !          2130:              && INTVAL (size) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp))
        !          2131:            emit_block_move (target, temp, size,
        !          2132:                             TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
        !          2133:          else
1.1       root     2134:            {
1.1.1.2 ! root     2135:              /* Compute the size of the data to copy from the string.  */
        !          2136:              tree copy_size
        !          2137:                = fold (build (MIN_EXPR, sizetype,
        !          2138:                               size_binop (CEIL_DIV_EXPR,
        !          2139:                                           TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp)),
        !          2140:                                           size_int (BITS_PER_UNIT)),
        !          2141:                               convert (sizetype,
        !          2142:                                        build_int_2 (TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp), 0))));
        !          2143:              rtx copy_size_rtx = expand_expr (copy_size, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
        !          2144:              rtx label = 0;
        !          2145: 
        !          2146:              /* Copy that much.  */
        !          2147:              emit_block_move (target, temp, copy_size_rtx,
        !          2148:                               TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
        !          2149: 
        !          2150:              /* Figure out how much is left in TARGET
        !          2151:                 that we have to clear.  */
        !          2152:              if (GET_CODE (copy_size_rtx) == CONST_INT)
        !          2153:                {
        !          2154:                  temp = plus_constant (XEXP (target, 0),
        !          2155:                                        TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp));
        !          2156:                  size = plus_constant (size,
        !          2157:                                        - TREE_STRING_LENGTH (exp));
        !          2158:                }
        !          2159:              else
        !          2160:                {
        !          2161:                  enum machine_mode size_mode = Pmode;
        !          2162: 
        !          2163:                  temp = force_reg (Pmode, XEXP (target, 0));
        !          2164:                  temp = expand_binop (size_mode, add_optab, temp,
        !          2165:                                       copy_size_rtx, 0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
        !          2166: 
        !          2167:                  size = expand_binop (size_mode, sub_optab, size,
        !          2168:                                       copy_size_rtx, 0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
        !          2169: 
        !          2170:                  emit_cmp_insn (size, const0_rtx, LT, 0,
        !          2171:                                 GET_MODE (size), 0, 0);
        !          2172:                  label = gen_label_rtx ();
        !          2173:                  emit_jump_insn (gen_blt (label));
        !          2174:                }
        !          2175: 
        !          2176:              if (size != const0_rtx)
        !          2177:                {
1.1       root     2178: #ifdef TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
1.1.1.2 ! root     2179:                  emit_library_call (memset_libfunc, 1, VOIDmode, 3,
        !          2180:                                     temp, Pmode, const0_rtx, Pmode, size, Pmode);
1.1       root     2181: #else
1.1.1.2 ! root     2182:                  emit_library_call (bzero_libfunc, 1, VOIDmode, 2,
        !          2183:                                     temp, Pmode, size, Pmode);
1.1       root     2184: #endif
1.1.1.2 ! root     2185:                }
        !          2186:              if (label)
        !          2187:                emit_label (label);
1.1       root     2188:            }
                   2189:        }
                   2190:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) == BLKmode)
                   2191:        emit_block_move (target, temp, expr_size (exp),
                   2192:                         TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   2193:       else
                   2194:        emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2195:     }
                   2196:   if (dont_return_target)
                   2197:     return temp;
                   2198:   return target;
                   2199: }
                   2200: 
                   2201: /* Store the value of constructor EXP into the rtx TARGET.
                   2202:    TARGET is either a REG or a MEM.  */
                   2203: 
                   2204: static void
                   2205: store_constructor (exp, target)
                   2206:      tree exp;
                   2207:      rtx target;
                   2208: {
                   2209:   /* We know our target cannot conflict, since safe_from_p has been called.  */
                   2210: #if 0
                   2211:   /* Don't try copying piece by piece into a hard register
                   2212:      since that is vulnerable to being clobbered by EXP.
                   2213:      Instead, construct in a pseudo register and then copy it all.  */
                   2214:   if (GET_CODE (target) == REG && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2215:     {
                   2216:       rtx temp = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   2217:       store_constructor (exp, temp);
                   2218:       emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2219:       return;
                   2220:     }
                   2221: #endif
                   2222: 
                   2223:   if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE
                   2224:       || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   2225:     {
                   2226:       register tree elt;
                   2227: 
                   2228:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   2229:        /* Inform later passes that the whole union value is dead.  */
                   2230:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2231:       /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure,
                   2232:         clear the whole structure first.  */
                   2233:       else if (list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp))
                   2234:               != list_length (TYPE_FIELDS (TREE_TYPE (exp))))
                   2235:        clear_storage (target, int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2236:       else
                   2237:        /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead.  */
                   2238:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2239: 
                   2240:       /* Store each element of the constructor into
                   2241:         the corresponding field of TARGET.  */
                   2242: 
                   2243:       for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
                   2244:        {
                   2245:          register tree field = TREE_PURPOSE (elt);
                   2246:          register enum machine_mode mode;
                   2247:          int bitsize;
                   2248:          int bitpos;
                   2249:          int unsignedp;
                   2250: 
                   2251:          bitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (field));
                   2252:          unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (field);
                   2253:          mode = DECL_MODE (field);
                   2254:          if (DECL_BIT_FIELD (field))
                   2255:            mode = VOIDmode;
                   2256: 
                   2257:          if (TREE_CODE (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2258:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2259:            abort ();
                   2260: 
                   2261:          bitpos = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field));
                   2262: 
                   2263:          store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, TREE_VALUE (elt),
                   2264:                       /* The alignment of TARGET is
                   2265:                          at least what its type requires.  */
                   2266:                       VOIDmode, 0,
                   2267:                       TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   2268:                       int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2269:        }
                   2270:     }
                   2271:   else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ARRAY_TYPE)
                   2272:     {
                   2273:       register tree elt;
                   2274:       register int i;
                   2275:       tree domain = TYPE_DOMAIN (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2276:       int minelt = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MIN_VALUE (domain));
                   2277:       int maxelt = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_MAX_VALUE (domain));
                   2278:       tree elttype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2279: 
                   2280:       /* If the constructor has fewer fields than the structure,
                   2281:         clear the whole structure first.  */
                   2282: 
                   2283:       if (list_length (CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp)) < maxelt - minelt + 1)
                   2284:        clear_storage (target, maxelt - minelt + 1);
                   2285:       else
                   2286:        /* Inform later passes that the old value is dead.  */
                   2287:        emit_insn (gen_rtx (CLOBBER, VOIDmode, target));
                   2288: 
                   2289:       /* Store each element of the constructor into
                   2290:         the corresponding element of TARGET, determined
                   2291:         by counting the elements.  */
                   2292:       for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp), i = 0;
                   2293:           elt;
                   2294:           elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt), i++)
                   2295:        {
                   2296:          register enum machine_mode mode;
                   2297:          int bitsize;
                   2298:          int bitpos;
                   2299:          int unsignedp;
                   2300: 
                   2301:          mode = TYPE_MODE (elttype);
                   2302:          bitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2303:          unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (elttype);
                   2304: 
                   2305:          bitpos = (i * TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (elttype)));
                   2306: 
                   2307:          store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, TREE_VALUE (elt),
                   2308:                       /* The alignment of TARGET is
                   2309:                          at least what its type requires.  */
                   2310:                       VOIDmode, 0,
                   2311:                       TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   2312:                       int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   2313:        }
                   2314:     }
                   2315: 
                   2316:   else
                   2317:     abort ();
                   2318: }
                   2319: 
                   2320: /* Store the value of EXP (an expression tree)
                   2321:    into a subfield of TARGET which has mode MODE and occupies
                   2322:    BITSIZE bits, starting BITPOS bits from the start of TARGET.
                   2323:    If MODE is VOIDmode, it means that we are storing into a bit-field.
                   2324: 
                   2325:    If VALUE_MODE is VOIDmode, return nothing in particular.
                   2326:    UNSIGNEDP is not used in this case.
                   2327: 
                   2328:    Otherwise, return an rtx for the value stored.  This rtx
                   2329:    has mode VALUE_MODE if that is convenient to do.
                   2330:    In this case, UNSIGNEDP must be nonzero if the value is an unsigned type.
                   2331: 
                   2332:    ALIGN is the alignment that TARGET is known to have, measured in bytes.
                   2333:    TOTAL_SIZE is the size in bytes of the structure, or -1 if varying.  */
                   2334: 
                   2335: static rtx
                   2336: store_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, value_mode,
                   2337:             unsignedp, align, total_size)
                   2338:      rtx target;
                   2339:      int bitsize, bitpos;
                   2340:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   2341:      tree exp;
                   2342:      enum machine_mode value_mode;
                   2343:      int unsignedp;
                   2344:      int align;
                   2345:      int total_size;
                   2346: {
                   2347:   int width_mask = 0;
                   2348: 
                   2349:   if (bitsize < HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   2350:     width_mask = (1 << bitsize) - 1;
                   2351: 
                   2352:   /* If we are storing into an unaligned field of an aligned union that is
                   2353:      in a register, we may have the mode of TARGET being an integer mode but
                   2354:      MODE == BLKmode.  In that case, get an aligned object whose size and
                   2355:      alignment are the same as TARGET and store TARGET into it (we can avoid
                   2356:      the store if the field being stored is the entire width of TARGET).  Then
                   2357:      call ourselves recursively to store the field into a BLKmode version of
                   2358:      that object.  Finally, load from the object into TARGET.  This is not
                   2359:      very efficient in general, but should only be slightly more expensive
                   2360:      than the otherwise-required unaligned accesses.  Perhaps this can be
                   2361:      cleaned up later.  */
                   2362: 
                   2363:   if (mode == BLKmode
                   2364:       && (GET_CODE (target) == REG || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG))
                   2365:     {
                   2366:       rtx object = assign_stack_temp (GET_MODE (target),
                   2367:                                      GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (target)), 0);
                   2368:       rtx blk_object = copy_rtx (object);
                   2369: 
                   2370:       PUT_MODE (blk_object, BLKmode);
                   2371: 
                   2372:       if (bitsize != GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (target)))
                   2373:        emit_move_insn (object, target);
                   2374: 
                   2375:       store_field (blk_object, bitsize, bitpos, mode, exp, VOIDmode, 0,
                   2376:                   align, total_size);
                   2377: 
                   2378:       emit_move_insn (target, object);
                   2379: 
                   2380:       return target;
                   2381:     }
                   2382: 
                   2383:   /* If the structure is in a register or if the component
                   2384:      is a bit field, we cannot use addressing to access it.
                   2385:      Use bit-field techniques or SUBREG to store in it.  */
                   2386: 
                   2387:   if (mode == VOIDmode || GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   2388:       || GET_CODE (target) == SUBREG)
                   2389:     {
                   2390:       rtx temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2391:       /* Store the value in the bitfield.  */
                   2392:       store_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, mode, temp, align, total_size);
                   2393:       if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   2394:        {
                   2395:          /* The caller wants an rtx for the value.  */
                   2396:          /* If possible, avoid refetching from the bitfield itself.  */
                   2397:          if (width_mask != 0
                   2398:              && ! (GET_CODE (target) == MEM && MEM_VOLATILE_P (target)))
                   2399:            return expand_and (temp,
                   2400:                               gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, width_mask), 0);
                   2401:          return extract_bit_field (target, bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp,
                   2402:                                    0, value_mode, 0, align, total_size);
                   2403:        }
                   2404:       return const0_rtx;
                   2405:     }
                   2406:   else
                   2407:     {
                   2408:       rtx addr = XEXP (target, 0);
                   2409:       rtx to_rtx;
                   2410: 
                   2411:       /* If a value is wanted, it must be the lhs;
                   2412:         so make the address stable for multiple use.  */
                   2413: 
                   2414:       if (value_mode != VOIDmode && GET_CODE (addr) != REG
                   2415:          && ! CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (addr)
                   2416:          /* A frame-pointer reference is already stable.  */
                   2417:          && ! (GET_CODE (addr) == PLUS
                   2418:                && GET_CODE (XEXP (addr, 1)) == CONST_INT
                   2419:                && (XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_incoming_args_rtx
                   2420:                    || XEXP (addr, 0) == virtual_stack_vars_rtx)))
                   2421:        addr = copy_to_reg (addr);
                   2422: 
                   2423:       /* Now build a reference to just the desired component.  */
                   2424: 
                   2425:       to_rtx = change_address (target, mode,
                   2426:                               plus_constant (addr, (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   2427:       MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (to_rtx) = 1;
                   2428: 
                   2429:       return store_expr (exp, to_rtx, value_mode != VOIDmode);
                   2430:     }
                   2431: }
                   2432: 
                   2433: /* Given an expression EXP that may be a COMPONENT_REF, a BIT_FIELD_REF,
                   2434:    or an ARRAY_REF, look for nested COMPONENT_REFs, BIT_FIELD_REFs, or
                   2435:    ARRAY_REFs at constant positions and find the ultimate containing object,
                   2436:    which we return.
                   2437: 
                   2438:    We set *PBITSIZE to the size in bits that we want, *PBITPOS to the
                   2439:    bit position, and *PUNSIGNEDP to the signedness of the field.
                   2440: 
                   2441:    If any of the extraction expressions is volatile,
                   2442:    we store 1 in *PVOLATILEP.  Otherwise we don't change that.
                   2443: 
                   2444:    If the field is a bit-field, *PMODE is set to VOIDmode.  Otherwise, it
                   2445:    is a mode that can be used to access the field.  In that case, *PBITSIZE
                   2446:    is redundant.  */
                   2447: 
                   2448: tree
                   2449: get_inner_reference (exp, pbitsize, pbitpos, pmode, punsignedp, pvolatilep)
                   2450:      tree exp;
                   2451:      int *pbitsize;
                   2452:      int *pbitpos;
                   2453:      enum machine_mode *pmode;
                   2454:      int *punsignedp;
                   2455:      int *pvolatilep;
                   2456: {
                   2457:   tree size_tree = 0;
                   2458:   enum machine_mode mode = VOIDmode;
                   2459: 
                   2460:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
                   2461:     {
                   2462:       size_tree = DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2463:       if (! DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   2464:        mode = DECL_MODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2465:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   2466:     }
                   2467:   else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
                   2468:     {
                   2469:       size_tree = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   2470:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (exp);
                   2471:     }
                   2472:   else
                   2473:     {
                   2474:       mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2475:       *pbitsize = GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode);
                   2476:       *punsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   2477:     }
                   2478:       
                   2479:   if (size_tree)
                   2480:     {
                   2481:       if (TREE_CODE (size_tree) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2482:        abort ();
                   2483: 
                   2484:       *pbitsize = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (size_tree);
                   2485:     }
                   2486: 
                   2487:   /* Compute cumulative bit-offset for nested component-refs and array-refs,
                   2488:      and find the ultimate containing object.  */
                   2489: 
                   2490:   *pbitpos = 0;
                   2491: 
                   2492:   while (1)
                   2493:     {
                   2494:       if (TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF)
                   2495:        {
                   2496:          tree field = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   2497: 
                   2498:          if (TREE_CODE (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2499:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2500:            abort ();
                   2501: 
                   2502:          *pbitpos += TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_FIELD_BITPOS (field));
                   2503:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2504:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2505:        }
                   2506:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == BIT_FIELD_REF)
                   2507:        {
                   2508:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   2509:            /* ??? This case remains to be written.  */
                   2510:            abort ();
                   2511: 
                   2512:          *pbitpos += TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2));
                   2513:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2514:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2515:        }
                   2516:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_REF
                   2517:               && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   2518:               && TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))) == INTEGER_CST)
                   2519:        {
                   2520:          *pbitpos += (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   2521:                       * TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (TREE_TYPE (exp))));
                   2522:          if (TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp))
                   2523:            *pvolatilep = 1;
                   2524:        }
                   2525:       else if (TREE_CODE (exp) != NON_LVALUE_EXPR
                   2526:               && ! ((TREE_CODE (exp) == NOP_EXPR
                   2527:                      || TREE_CODE (exp) == CONVERT_EXPR)
                   2528:                     && (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp))
                   2529:                         == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))))
                   2530:        break;
                   2531:       exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   2532:     }
                   2533: 
                   2534:   /* If this was a bit-field, see if there is a mode that allows direct
                   2535:      access in case EXP is in memory.  */
                   2536:   if (mode == VOIDmode && *pbitpos % *pbitsize == 0)
                   2537:     {
                   2538:       mode = mode_for_size (*pbitsize, MODE_INT, 0);
                   2539:       if (mode == BLKmode)
                   2540:        mode = VOIDmode;
                   2541:     }
                   2542: 
                   2543:   *pmode = mode;
                   2544: 
                   2545:   return exp;
                   2546: }
                   2547: 
                   2548: /* Given an rtx VALUE that may contain additions and multiplications,
                   2549:    return an equivalent value that just refers to a register or memory.
                   2550:    This is done by generating instructions to perform the arithmetic
                   2551:    and returning a pseudo-register containing the value.  */
                   2552: 
                   2553: rtx
                   2554: force_operand (value, target)
                   2555:      rtx value, target;
                   2556: {
                   2557:   register optab binoptab = 0;
                   2558:   /* Use a temporary to force order of execution of calls to
                   2559:      `force_operand'.  */
                   2560:   rtx tmp;
                   2561:   register rtx op2;
                   2562:   /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation.  */
                   2563:   register rtx subtarget = (target != 0 && GET_CODE (target) == REG ? target : 0);
                   2564: 
                   2565:   if (GET_CODE (value) == PLUS)
                   2566:     binoptab = add_optab;
                   2567:   else if (GET_CODE (value) == MINUS)
                   2568:     binoptab = sub_optab;
                   2569:   else if (GET_CODE (value) == MULT)
                   2570:     {
                   2571:       op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
                   2572:       if (!CONSTANT_P (op2)
                   2573:          && !(GET_CODE (op2) == REG && op2 != subtarget))
                   2574:        subtarget = 0;
                   2575:       tmp = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
                   2576:       return expand_mult (GET_MODE (value), tmp,
                   2577:                          force_operand (op2, 0),
                   2578:                          target, 0);
                   2579:     }
                   2580: 
                   2581:   if (binoptab)
                   2582:     {
                   2583:       op2 = XEXP (value, 1);
                   2584:       if (!CONSTANT_P (op2)
                   2585:          && !(GET_CODE (op2) == REG && op2 != subtarget))
                   2586:        subtarget = 0;
                   2587:       if (binoptab == sub_optab && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT)
                   2588:        {
                   2589:          binoptab = add_optab;
                   2590:          op2 = negate_rtx (GET_MODE (value), op2);
                   2591:        }
                   2592: 
                   2593:       /* Check for an addition with OP2 a constant integer and our first
                   2594:         operand a PLUS of a virtual register and something else.  In that
                   2595:         case, we want to emit the sum of the virtual register and the
                   2596:         constant first and then add the other value.  This allows virtual
                   2597:         register instantiation to simply modify the constant rather than
                   2598:         creating another one around this addition.  */
                   2599:       if (binoptab == add_optab && GET_CODE (op2) == CONST_INT
                   2600:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (value, 0)) == PLUS
                   2601:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) == REG
                   2602:          && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) >= FIRST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER
                   2603:          && REGNO (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0)) <= LAST_VIRTUAL_REGISTER)
                   2604:        {
                   2605:          rtx temp = expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab,
                   2606:                                   XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 0), op2,
                   2607:                                   subtarget, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2608:          return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab, temp,
                   2609:                               force_operand (XEXP (XEXP (value, 0), 1), 0),
                   2610:                               target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2611:        }
                   2612:                                   
                   2613:       tmp = force_operand (XEXP (value, 0), subtarget);
                   2614:       return expand_binop (GET_MODE (value), binoptab, tmp,
                   2615:                           force_operand (op2, 0),
                   2616:                           target, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   2617:       /* We give UNSIGNEP = 0 to expand_binop
                   2618:         because the only operations we are expanding here are signed ones.  */
                   2619:     }
                   2620:   return value;
                   2621: }
                   2622: 
                   2623: /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
                   2624:    save the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
                   2625:    which can restore these values to their previous values,
                   2626:    should something modify their storage.  */
                   2627: 
                   2628: static tree
                   2629: save_noncopied_parts (lhs, list)
                   2630:      tree lhs;
                   2631:      tree list;
                   2632: {
                   2633:   tree tail;
                   2634:   tree parts = 0;
                   2635: 
                   2636:   for (tail = list; tail; tail = TREE_CHAIN (tail))
                   2637:     if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail)) == TREE_LIST)
                   2638:       parts = chainon (parts, save_noncopied_parts (lhs, TREE_VALUE (tail)));
                   2639:     else
                   2640:       {
                   2641:        tree part = TREE_VALUE (tail);
                   2642:        tree part_type = TREE_TYPE (part);
                   2643:        tree to_be_saved = build (COMPONENT_REF, part_type, lhs, part, 0);
                   2644:        rtx target = assign_stack_temp (TYPE_MODE (part_type),
                   2645:                                        int_size_in_bytes (part_type), 0);
                   2646:        if (! memory_address_p (TYPE_MODE (part_type), XEXP (target, 0)))
                   2647:          target = change_address (target, TYPE_MODE (part_type), 0);
                   2648:        parts = tree_cons (to_be_saved,
                   2649:                           build (RTL_EXPR, part_type, 0, (tree) target),
                   2650:                           parts);
                   2651:        store_expr (TREE_PURPOSE (parts), RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_VALUE (parts)), 0);
                   2652:       }
                   2653:   return parts;
                   2654: }
                   2655: 
                   2656: /* Subroutine of expand_expr:
                   2657:    record the non-copied parts (LIST) of an expr (LHS), and return a list
                   2658:    which specifies the initial values of these parts.  */
                   2659: 
                   2660: static tree
                   2661: init_noncopied_parts (lhs, list)
                   2662:      tree lhs;
                   2663:      tree list;
                   2664: {
                   2665:   tree tail;
                   2666:   tree parts = 0;
                   2667: 
                   2668:   for (tail = list; tail; tail = TREE_CHAIN (tail))
                   2669:     if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (tail)) == TREE_LIST)
                   2670:       parts = chainon (parts, init_noncopied_parts (lhs, TREE_VALUE (tail)));
                   2671:     else
                   2672:       {
                   2673:        tree part = TREE_VALUE (tail);
                   2674:        tree part_type = TREE_TYPE (part);
                   2675:        tree to_be_initialized = build (COMPONENT_REF, part_type, lhs, part, 0);
                   2676:        parts = tree_cons (TREE_PURPOSE (tail), to_be_initialized, parts);
                   2677:       }
                   2678:   return parts;
                   2679: }
                   2680: 
                   2681: /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff there is no way that
                   2682:    EXP can reference X, which is being modified.  */
                   2683: 
                   2684: static int
                   2685: safe_from_p (x, exp)
                   2686:      rtx x;
                   2687:      tree exp;
                   2688: {
                   2689:   rtx exp_rtl = 0;
                   2690:   int i, nops;
                   2691: 
                   2692:   if (x == 0)
                   2693:     return 1;
                   2694: 
                   2695:   /* If this is a subreg of a hard register, declare it unsafe, otherwise,
                   2696:      find the underlying pseudo.  */
                   2697:   if (GET_CODE (x) == SUBREG)
                   2698:     {
                   2699:       x = SUBREG_REG (x);
                   2700:       if (GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2701:        return 0;
                   2702:     }
                   2703: 
                   2704:   /* If X is a location in the outgoing argument area, it is always safe.  */
                   2705:   if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM
                   2706:       && (XEXP (x, 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx
                   2707:          || (GET_CODE (XEXP (x, 0)) == PLUS
                   2708:              && XEXP (XEXP (x, 0), 0) == virtual_outgoing_args_rtx)))
                   2709:     return 1;
                   2710: 
                   2711:   switch (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)))
                   2712:     {
                   2713:     case 'd':
                   2714:       exp_rtl = DECL_RTL (exp);
                   2715:       break;
                   2716: 
                   2717:     case 'c':
                   2718:       return 1;
                   2719: 
                   2720:     case 'x':
                   2721:       if (TREE_CODE (exp) == TREE_LIST)
                   2722:        return (safe_from_p (x, TREE_VALUE (exp))
                   2723:                && (TREE_CHAIN (exp) == 0
                   2724:                    || safe_from_p (x, TREE_CHAIN (exp))));
                   2725:       else
                   2726:        return 0;
                   2727: 
                   2728:     case '1':
                   2729:       return safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   2730: 
                   2731:     case '2':
                   2732:     case '<':
                   2733:       return (safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   2734:              && safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
                   2735: 
                   2736:     case 'e':
                   2737:     case 'r':
                   2738:       /* Now do code-specific tests.  EXP_RTL is set to any rtx we find in
                   2739:         the expression.  If it is set, we conflict iff we are that rtx or
                   2740:         both are in memory.  Otherwise, we check all operands of the
                   2741:         expression recursively.  */
                   2742: 
                   2743:       switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   2744:        {
                   2745:        case ADDR_EXPR:
                   2746:          return staticp (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   2747: 
                   2748:        case INDIRECT_REF:
                   2749:          if (GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   2750:            return 0;
                   2751:          break;
                   2752: 
                   2753:        case CALL_EXPR:
                   2754:          exp_rtl = CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2755:          if (exp_rtl == 0)
                   2756:            {
                   2757:              /* Assume that the call will clobber all hard registers and
                   2758:                 all of memory.  */
                   2759:              if ((GET_CODE (x) == REG && REGNO (x) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2760:                  || GET_CODE (x) == MEM)
                   2761:                return 0;
                   2762:            }
                   2763: 
                   2764:          break;
                   2765: 
                   2766:        case RTL_EXPR:
                   2767:          exp_rtl = RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2768:          if (exp_rtl == 0)
                   2769:            /* We don't know what this can modify.  */
                   2770:            return 0;
                   2771: 
                   2772:          break;
                   2773: 
                   2774:        case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   2775:          exp_rtl = RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2776:          break;
                   2777: 
                   2778:        case SAVE_EXPR:
                   2779:          exp_rtl = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   2780:          break;
                   2781: 
                   2782:        case METHOD_CALL_EXPR:
                   2783:          /* This takes a rtx argument, but shouldn't appear here. */
                   2784:          abort ();
                   2785:        }
                   2786: 
                   2787:       /* If we have an rtx, we do not need to scan our operands.  */
                   2788:       if (exp_rtl)
                   2789:        break;
                   2790: 
                   2791:       nops = tree_code_length[(int) TREE_CODE (exp)];
                   2792:       for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
                   2793:        if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0
                   2794:            && ! safe_from_p (x, TREE_OPERAND (exp, i)))
                   2795:          return 0;
                   2796:     }
                   2797: 
                   2798:   /* If we have an rtl, find any enclosed object.  Then see if we conflict
                   2799:      with it.  */
                   2800:   if (exp_rtl)
                   2801:     {
                   2802:       if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == SUBREG)
                   2803:        {
                   2804:          exp_rtl = SUBREG_REG (exp_rtl);
                   2805:          if (GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == REG
                   2806:              && REGNO (exp_rtl) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2807:            return 0;
                   2808:        }
                   2809: 
                   2810:       /* If the rtl is X, then it is not safe.  Otherwise, it is unless both
                   2811:         are memory and EXP is not readonly.  */
                   2812:       return ! (rtx_equal_p (x, exp_rtl)
                   2813:                || (GET_CODE (x) == MEM && GET_CODE (exp_rtl) == MEM
                   2814:                    && ! TREE_READONLY (exp)));
                   2815:     }
                   2816: 
                   2817:   /* If we reach here, it is safe.  */
                   2818:   return 1;
                   2819: }
                   2820: 
                   2821: /* Subroutine of expand_expr: return nonzero iff EXP is an
                   2822:    expression whose type is statically determinable.  */
                   2823: 
                   2824: static int
                   2825: fixed_type_p (exp)
                   2826:      tree exp;
                   2827: {
                   2828:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == PARM_DECL
                   2829:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == VAR_DECL
                   2830:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == CALL_EXPR || TREE_CODE (exp) == TARGET_EXPR
                   2831:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == COMPONENT_REF
                   2832:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == ARRAY_REF)
                   2833:     return 1;
                   2834:   return 0;
                   2835: }
                   2836: 
                   2837: /* expand_expr: generate code for computing expression EXP.
                   2838:    An rtx for the computed value is returned.  The value is never null.
                   2839:    In the case of a void EXP, const0_rtx is returned.
                   2840: 
                   2841:    The value may be stored in TARGET if TARGET is nonzero.
                   2842:    TARGET is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
                   2843:    the rtx returned may not be the same as TARGET.
                   2844: 
                   2845:    If TARGET is CONST0_RTX, it means that the value will be ignored.
                   2846: 
                   2847:    If TMODE is not VOIDmode, it suggests generating the
                   2848:    result in mode TMODE.  But this is done only when convenient.
                   2849:    Otherwise, TMODE is ignored and the value generated in its natural mode.
                   2850:    TMODE is just a suggestion; callers must assume that
                   2851:    the rtx returned may not have mode TMODE.
                   2852: 
                   2853:    EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS says that it is okay to return a MEM
                   2854:    with a constant address even if that address is not normally legitimate.
                   2855:    EXPAND_INITIALIZER and EXPAND_SUM also have this effect.
                   2856: 
                   2857:    If MODIFIER is EXPAND_SUM then when EXP is an addition
                   2858:    we can return an rtx of the form (MULT (REG ...) (CONST_INT ...))
                   2859:    or a nest of (PLUS ...) and (MINUS ...) where the terms are
                   2860:    products as above, or REG or MEM, or constant.
                   2861:    Ordinarily in such cases we would output mul or add instructions
                   2862:    and then return a pseudo reg containing the sum.
                   2863: 
                   2864:    EXPAND_INITIALIZER is much like EXPAND_SUM except that
                   2865:    it also marks a label as absolutely required (it can't be dead).
                   2866:    This is used for outputting expressions used in intializers.  */
                   2867: 
                   2868: rtx
                   2869: expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier)
                   2870:      register tree exp;
                   2871:      rtx target;
                   2872:      enum machine_mode tmode;
                   2873:      enum expand_modifier modifier;
                   2874: {
                   2875:   register rtx op0, op1, temp;
                   2876:   tree type = TREE_TYPE (exp);
                   2877:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   2878:   register enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   2879:   register enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
                   2880:   optab this_optab;
                   2881:   /* Use subtarget as the target for operand 0 of a binary operation.  */
                   2882:   rtx subtarget = (target != 0 && GET_CODE (target) == REG ? target : 0);
                   2883:   rtx original_target = target;
                   2884:   int ignore = target == const0_rtx;
                   2885:   tree context;
                   2886: 
                   2887:   /* Don't use hard regs as subtargets, because the combiner
                   2888:      can only handle pseudo regs.  */
                   2889:   if (subtarget && REGNO (subtarget) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   2890:     subtarget = 0;
                   2891:   /* Avoid subtargets inside loops,
                   2892:      since they hide some invariant expressions.  */
                   2893:   if (preserve_subexpressions_p ())
                   2894:     subtarget = 0;
                   2895: 
                   2896:   if (ignore) target = 0, original_target = 0;
                   2897: 
                   2898:   /* If will do cse, generate all results into pseudo registers
                   2899:      since 1) that allows cse to find more things
                   2900:      and 2) otherwise cse could produce an insn the machine
                   2901:      cannot support.  */
                   2902: 
                   2903:   if (! cse_not_expected && mode != BLKmode && target
                   2904:       && (GET_CODE (target) != REG || REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   2905:     target = subtarget;
                   2906: 
                   2907:   /* Ensure we reference a volatile object even if value is ignored.  */
                   2908:   if (ignore && TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp)
                   2909:       && mode != VOIDmode && mode != BLKmode)
                   2910:     {
                   2911:       target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   2912:       temp = expand_expr (exp, target, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   2913:       if (temp != target)
                   2914:        emit_move_insn (target, temp);
                   2915:       return target;
                   2916:     }
                   2917: 
                   2918:   switch (code)
                   2919:     {
                   2920:     case LABEL_DECL:
                   2921:       if (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   2922:        forced_labels = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, VOIDmode,
                   2923:                                 label_rtx (exp), forced_labels);
                   2924:       return gen_rtx (MEM, FUNCTION_MODE,
                   2925:                      gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, label_rtx (exp)));
                   2926: 
                   2927:     case PARM_DECL:
                   2928:       if (DECL_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   2929:        {
                   2930:          error_with_decl (exp, "prior parameter's size depends on `%s'");
                   2931:          return const0_rtx;
                   2932:        }
                   2933: 
                   2934:     case FUNCTION_DECL:
                   2935:     case VAR_DECL:
                   2936:     case RESULT_DECL:
                   2937:       if (DECL_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   2938:        abort ();
                   2939:       /* Ensure variable marked as used
                   2940:         even if it doesn't go through a parser.  */
                   2941:       TREE_USED (exp) = 1;
                   2942:       /* Handle variables inherited from containing functions.  */
                   2943:       context = decl_function_context (exp);
                   2944: 
                   2945:       /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
                   2946:         because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
                   2947:         are being merged into the current function.
                   2948:         See expand_inline_function.  */
                   2949:       if (context != 0 && context != current_function_decl
                   2950:          && context != inline_function_decl
                   2951:          /* If var is static, we don't need a static chain to access it.  */
                   2952:          && ! (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2953:                && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))))
                   2954:        {
                   2955:          rtx addr;
                   2956: 
                   2957:          /* Mark as non-local and addressable.  */
                   2958:          TREE_NONLOCAL (exp) = 1;
                   2959:          mark_addressable (exp);
                   2960:          if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) != MEM)
                   2961:            abort ();
                   2962:          addr = XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0);
                   2963:          if (GET_CODE (addr) == MEM)
                   2964:            addr = gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (addr, 0), exp));
                   2965:          else
                   2966:            addr = fix_lexical_addr (addr, exp);
                   2967:          return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), mode, addr);
                   2968:        }
                   2969:       /* This is the case of an array whose size is to be determined
                   2970:         from its initializer, while the initializer is still being parsed.
                   2971:         See expand_decl.  */
                   2972:       if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2973:          && GET_CODE (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)) == REG)
                   2974:        return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), GET_MODE (DECL_RTL (exp)),
                   2975:                               XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0));
                   2976:       if (GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   2977:          && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   2978:          && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
                   2979:          && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   2980:        {
                   2981:          /* DECL_RTL probably contains a constant address.
                   2982:             On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
                   2983:             make some insns to get that address into a register.  */
                   2984:          if (!memory_address_p (DECL_MODE (exp), XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))
                   2985:              || (flag_force_addr
                   2986:                  && CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0))))
                   2987:            return change_address (DECL_RTL (exp), VOIDmode,
                   2988:                                   copy_rtx (XEXP (DECL_RTL (exp), 0)));
                   2989:        }
                   2990:       return DECL_RTL (exp);
                   2991: 
                   2992:     case INTEGER_CST:
                   2993:       return immed_double_const (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (exp),
                   2994:                                 TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (exp),
                   2995:                                 mode);
                   2996: 
                   2997:     case CONST_DECL:
                   2998:       return expand_expr (DECL_INITIAL (exp), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   2999: 
                   3000:     case REAL_CST:
                   3001:       /* If optimized, generate immediate CONST_DOUBLE
                   3002:         which will be turned into memory by reload if necessary. 
                   3003:      
                   3004:         We used to force a register so that loop.c could see it.  But
                   3005:         this does not allow gen_* patterns to perform optimizations with
                   3006:         the constants.  It also produces two insns in cases like "x = 1.0;".
                   3007:         On most machines, floating-point constants are not permitted in
                   3008:         many insns, so we'd end up copying it to a register in any case.
                   3009: 
                   3010:         Now, we do the copying in expand_binop, if appropriate.  */
                   3011:       return immed_real_const (exp);
                   3012: 
                   3013:     case COMPLEX_CST:
                   3014:     case STRING_CST:
                   3015:       if (! TREE_CST_RTL (exp))
                   3016:        output_constant_def (exp);
                   3017: 
                   3018:       /* TREE_CST_RTL probably contains a constant address.
                   3019:         On RISC machines where a constant address isn't valid,
                   3020:         make some insns to get that address into a register.  */
                   3021:       if (GET_CODE (TREE_CST_RTL (exp)) == MEM
                   3022:          && modifier != EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   3023:          && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   3024:          && modifier != EXPAND_SUM
                   3025:          && !memory_address_p (mode, XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)))
                   3026:        return change_address (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), VOIDmode,
                   3027:                               copy_rtx (XEXP (TREE_CST_RTL (exp), 0)));
                   3028:       return TREE_CST_RTL (exp);
                   3029: 
                   3030:     case SAVE_EXPR:
                   3031:       context = decl_function_context (exp);
                   3032:       /* We treat inline_function_decl as an alias for the current function
                   3033:         because that is the inline function whose vars, types, etc.
                   3034:         are being merged into the current function.
                   3035:         See expand_inline_function.  */
                   3036:       if (context == current_function_decl || context == inline_function_decl)
                   3037:        context = 0;
                   3038: 
                   3039:       /* If this is non-local, handle it.  */
                   3040:       if (context)
                   3041:        {
                   3042:          temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3043:          if (temp && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
                   3044:            {
                   3045:              put_var_into_stack (exp);
                   3046:              temp = SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3047:            }
                   3048:          if (temp == 0 || GET_CODE (temp) != MEM)
                   3049:            abort ();
                   3050:          return change_address (temp, mode,
                   3051:                                 fix_lexical_addr (XEXP (temp, 0), exp));
                   3052:        }
                   3053:       if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   3054:        {
                   3055:          if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3056:            temp
                   3057:              = assign_stack_temp (mode,
                   3058:                                   int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (exp)), 0);
                   3059:          else
                   3060:            temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3061:          SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) = temp;
                   3062:          store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), temp, 0);
                   3063:          if (!optimize && GET_CODE (temp) == REG)
                   3064:            save_expr_regs = gen_rtx (EXPR_LIST, VOIDmode, temp,
                   3065:                                      save_expr_regs);
                   3066:        }
                   3067:       return SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3068: 
                   3069:     case EXIT_EXPR:
                   3070:       /* Exit the current loop if the body-expression is true.  */
                   3071:       {
                   3072:        rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3073:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), label, 0);
                   3074:        expand_exit_loop (0);
                   3075:        emit_label (label);
                   3076:       }
                   3077:       return const0_rtx;
                   3078: 
                   3079:     case LOOP_EXPR:
                   3080:       expand_start_loop (1);
                   3081:       expand_expr_stmt (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3082:       expand_end_loop ();
                   3083: 
                   3084:       return const0_rtx;
                   3085: 
                   3086:     case BIND_EXPR:
                   3087:       {
                   3088:        tree vars = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3089:        int vars_need_expansion = 0;
                   3090: 
                   3091:        /* Need to open a binding contour here because
                   3092:           if there are any cleanups they most be contained here.  */
                   3093:        expand_start_bindings (0);
                   3094: 
                   3095:        /* Mark the corresponding BLOCK for output.  */
                   3096:        if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) != 0)
                   3097:          TREE_USED (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) = 1;
                   3098: 
                   3099:        /* If VARS have not yet been expanded, expand them now.  */
                   3100:        while (vars)
                   3101:          {
                   3102:            if (DECL_RTL (vars) == 0)
                   3103:              {
                   3104:                vars_need_expansion = 1;
                   3105:                expand_decl (vars);
                   3106:              }
                   3107:            expand_decl_init (vars);
                   3108:            vars = TREE_CHAIN (vars);
                   3109:          }
                   3110: 
                   3111:        temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3112: 
                   3113:        expand_end_bindings (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, 0);
                   3114: 
                   3115:        return temp;
                   3116:       }
                   3117: 
                   3118:     case RTL_EXPR:
                   3119:       if (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) == const0_rtx)
                   3120:        abort ();
                   3121:       emit_insns (RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp));
                   3122:       RTL_EXPR_SEQUENCE (exp) = const0_rtx;
                   3123:       return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3124: 
                   3125:     case CONSTRUCTOR:
                   3126:       /* All elts simple constants => refer to a constant in memory.  */
                   3127:       if (TREE_STATIC (exp))
                   3128:        /* For aggregate types with non-BLKmode modes,
                   3129:           this should ideally construct a CONST_INT.  */
                   3130:        {
                   3131:          rtx constructor = output_constant_def (exp);
                   3132:          if (! memory_address_p (GET_MODE (constructor),
                   3133:                                  XEXP (constructor, 0)))
                   3134:            constructor = change_address (constructor, VOIDmode,
                   3135:                                          XEXP (constructor, 0));
                   3136:          return constructor;
                   3137:        }
                   3138: 
                   3139:       if (ignore)
                   3140:        {
                   3141:          tree elt;
                   3142:          for (elt = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (exp); elt; elt = TREE_CHAIN (elt))
                   3143:            expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (elt), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3144:          return const0_rtx;
                   3145:        }
                   3146:       else
                   3147:        {
                   3148:          if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp))
                   3149:            {
                   3150:              if (mode != BLKmode && ! TREE_ADDRESSABLE (exp))
                   3151:                target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3152:              else
                   3153:                {
                   3154:                  rtx safe_target = assign_stack_temp (mode, int_size_in_bytes (type), 0);
                   3155:                  if (target)
                   3156:                    MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (safe_target) = MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (target);
                   3157:                  target = safe_target;
                   3158:                }
                   3159:            }
                   3160:          store_constructor (exp, target);
                   3161:          return target;
                   3162:        }
                   3163: 
                   3164:     case INDIRECT_REF:
                   3165:       {
                   3166:        tree exp1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3167:        tree exp2;
                   3168: 
                   3169:        /* A SAVE_EXPR as the address in an INDIRECT_EXPR is generated
                   3170:           for  *PTR += ANYTHING  where PTR is put inside the SAVE_EXPR.
                   3171:           This code has the same general effect as simply doing
                   3172:           expand_expr on the save expr, except that the expression PTR
                   3173:           is computed for use as a memory address.  This means different
                   3174:           code, suitable for indexing, may be generated.  */
                   3175:        if (TREE_CODE (exp1) == SAVE_EXPR
                   3176:            && SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp1) == 0
                   3177:            && TREE_CODE (exp2 = TREE_OPERAND (exp1, 0)) != ERROR_MARK
                   3178:            && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp1)) == Pmode
                   3179:            && TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp2)) == Pmode)
                   3180:          {
                   3181:            temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp1, 0), 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3182:            op0 = memory_address (mode, temp);
                   3183:            op0 = copy_all_regs (op0);
                   3184:            SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp1) = op0;
                   3185:          }
                   3186:        else
                   3187:          {
                   3188:            op0 = expand_expr (exp1, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3189:            op0 = memory_address (mode, op0);
                   3190:          }
                   3191:       }
                   3192:       temp = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, op0);
                   3193:       /* If address was computed by addition,
                   3194:         mark this as an element of an aggregate.  */
                   3195:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
                   3196:          || (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == SAVE_EXPR
                   3197:              && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) == PLUS_EXPR)
                   3198:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == ARRAY_TYPE
                   3199:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == RECORD_TYPE
                   3200:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) == UNION_TYPE)
                   3201:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (temp) = 1;
                   3202:       MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp) || flag_volatile;
                   3203: #if 0 /* It is incorrectto set RTX_UNCHANGING_P here, because the fact that
                   3204:         a location is accessed through a pointer to const does not mean
                   3205:         that the value there can never change.  */
                   3206:       RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3207: #endif
                   3208:       return temp;
                   3209: 
                   3210:     case ARRAY_REF:
                   3211:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != INTEGER_CST
                   3212:          || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   3213:        {
                   3214:          /* Nonconstant array index or nonconstant element size.
                   3215:             Generate the tree for *(&array+index) and expand that,
                   3216:             except do it in a language-independent way
                   3217:             and don't complain about non-lvalue arrays.
                   3218:             `mark_addressable' should already have been called
                   3219:             for any array for which this case will be reached.  */
                   3220: 
                   3221:          /* Don't forget the const or volatile flag from the array element. */
                   3222:          tree variant_type = build_type_variant (type,
                   3223:                                                  TREE_READONLY (exp),
                   3224:                                                  TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp));
                   3225:          tree array_adr = build1 (ADDR_EXPR, build_pointer_type (variant_type),
                   3226:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3227:          tree index = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3228:          tree elt;
                   3229: 
                   3230:          /* Convert the integer argument to a type the same size as a pointer
                   3231:             so the multiply won't overflow spuriously.  */
                   3232:          if (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (index)) != POINTER_SIZE)
                   3233:            index = convert (type_for_size (POINTER_SIZE, 0), index);
                   3234: 
                   3235:          /* Don't think the address has side effects
                   3236:             just because the array does.
                   3237:             (In some cases the address might have side effects,
                   3238:             and we fail to record that fact here.  However, it should not
                   3239:             matter, since expand_expr should not care.)  */
                   3240:          TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (array_adr) = 0;
                   3241: 
                   3242:          elt = build1 (INDIRECT_REF, type,
                   3243:                        fold (build (PLUS_EXPR, TYPE_POINTER_TO (variant_type),
                   3244:                                     array_adr,
                   3245:                                     fold (build (MULT_EXPR,
                   3246:                                                  TYPE_POINTER_TO (variant_type),
                   3247:                                                  index, size_in_bytes (type))))));
                   3248: 
                   3249:          /* Volatility, etc., of new expression is same as old expression.  */
                   3250:          TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (elt) = TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (exp);
                   3251:          TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (elt) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp);
                   3252:          TREE_READONLY (elt) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3253: 
                   3254:          return expand_expr (elt, target, tmode, modifier);
                   3255:        }
                   3256: 
                   3257:       /* Fold an expression like: "foo"[2].
                   3258:         This is not done in fold so it won't happen inside &.  */
                   3259:       {
                   3260:        int i;
                   3261:        tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3262:        tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3263: 
                   3264:        if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == STRING_CST
                   3265:            && TREE_CODE (arg1) == INTEGER_CST
                   3266:            && !TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (arg1)
                   3267:            && (i = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (arg1)) < TREE_STRING_LENGTH (arg0))
                   3268:          {
                   3269:            if (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)) == integer_type_node)
                   3270:              {
                   3271:                exp = build_int_2 (((int *)TREE_STRING_POINTER (arg0))[i], 0);
                   3272:                TREE_TYPE (exp) = integer_type_node;
                   3273:                return expand_expr (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
                   3274:              }
                   3275:            if (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)) == char_type_node)
                   3276:              {
                   3277:                exp = build_int_2 (TREE_STRING_POINTER (arg0)[i], 0);
                   3278:                TREE_TYPE (exp) = integer_type_node;
                   3279:                return expand_expr (convert (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (arg0)), exp), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3280:              }
                   3281:          }
                   3282:       }
                   3283: 
                   3284:       /* If this is a constant index into a constant array,
                   3285:         just get the value from the array.  */
                   3286:       if (TREE_READONLY (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3287:          && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3288:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == ARRAY_TYPE
                   3289:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == VAR_DECL
                   3290:          && DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3291:          && TREE_CODE (DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) != ERROR_MARK)
                   3292:        {
                   3293:          tree index = fold (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   3294:          if (TREE_CODE (index) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3295:            {
                   3296:              int i = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (index);
                   3297:              tree init = CONSTRUCTOR_ELTS (DECL_INITIAL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   3298: 
                   3299:              while (init && i--)
                   3300:                init = TREE_CHAIN (init);
                   3301:              if (init)
                   3302:                return expand_expr (fold (TREE_VALUE (init)), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3303:            }
                   3304:        }
                   3305:       /* Treat array-ref with constant index as a component-ref.  */
                   3306: 
                   3307:     case COMPONENT_REF:
                   3308:     case BIT_FIELD_REF:
                   3309:       {
                   3310:        enum machine_mode mode1;
                   3311:        int bitsize;
                   3312:        int bitpos;
                   3313:        int volatilep = 0;
                   3314:        tree tem = get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos,
                   3315:                                        &mode1, &unsignedp, &volatilep);
                   3316: 
                   3317:        /* In some cases, we will be offsetting OP0's address by a constant.
                   3318:           So get it as a sum, if possible.  If we will be using it
                   3319:           directly in an insn, we validate it.  */
                   3320:        op0 = expand_expr (tem, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3321: 
                   3322:        /* Don't forget about volatility even if this is a bitfield.  */
                   3323:        if (GET_CODE (op0) == MEM && volatilep && ! MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0))
                   3324:          {
                   3325:            op0 = copy_rtx (op0);
                   3326:            MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) = 1;
                   3327:          }
                   3328: 
                   3329:        if (mode1 == VOIDmode
                   3330:            || GET_CODE (op0) == REG || GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG)
                   3331:          {
                   3332:            /* In cases where an aligned union has an unaligned object
                   3333:               as a field, we might be extracting a BLKmode value from
                   3334:               an integer-mode (e.g., SImode) object.  Handle this case
                   3335:               by doing the extract into an object as wide as the field
                   3336:               (which we know to be the width of a basic mode), then
                   3337:               storing into memory, and changing the mode to BLKmode.  */
                   3338:            enum machine_mode ext_mode = mode;
                   3339: 
                   3340:            if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
                   3341:              ext_mode = mode_for_size (bitsize, MODE_INT, 1);
                   3342: 
                   3343:            if (ext_mode == BLKmode)
                   3344:              abort ();
                   3345: 
                   3346:            op0 = extract_bit_field (validize_mem (op0), bitsize, bitpos,
                   3347:                                     unsignedp, target, ext_mode, ext_mode,
                   3348:                                     TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (tem)) / BITS_PER_UNIT,
                   3349:                                     int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (tem)));
                   3350:            if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3351:              {
                   3352:                rtx new = assign_stack_temp (ext_mode,
                   3353:                                             bitsize / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   3354: 
                   3355:                emit_move_insn (new, op0);
                   3356:                op0 = copy_rtx (new);
                   3357:                PUT_MODE (op0, BLKmode);
                   3358:              }
                   3359: 
                   3360:            return op0;
                   3361:          }
                   3362: 
                   3363:        /* Get a reference to just this component.  */
                   3364:        if (modifier == EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS
                   3365:            || modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3366:          op0 = gen_rtx (MEM, mode1, plus_constant (XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3367:                                                    (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   3368:        else
                   3369:          op0 = change_address (op0, mode1,
                   3370:                                plus_constant (XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3371:                                               (bitpos / BITS_PER_UNIT)));
                   3372:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (op0) = 1;
                   3373:        MEM_VOLATILE_P (op0) |= volatilep;
                   3374:        if (mode == mode1 || mode1 == BLKmode || mode1 == tmode)
                   3375:          return op0;
                   3376:        if (target == 0)
                   3377:          target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
                   3378:        convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   3379:        return target;
                   3380:       }
                   3381: 
                   3382:     case OFFSET_REF:
                   3383:       {
                   3384:        tree base = build_unary_op (ADDR_EXPR, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   3385:        tree addr = build (PLUS_EXPR, type, base, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   3386:        op0 = expand_expr (addr, 0, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3387:        temp = gen_rtx (MEM, mode, memory_address (mode, op0));
                   3388:        MEM_IN_STRUCT_P (temp) = 1;
                   3389:        MEM_VOLATILE_P (temp) = TREE_THIS_VOLATILE (exp) || flag_volatile;
                   3390: #if 0 /* It is incorrectto set RTX_UNCHANGING_P here, because the fact that
                   3391:         a location is accessed through a pointer to const does not mean
                   3392:         that the value there can never change.  */
                   3393:        RTX_UNCHANGING_P (temp) = TREE_READONLY (exp);
                   3394: #endif
                   3395:        return temp;
                   3396:       }
                   3397: 
                   3398:       /* Intended for a reference to a buffer of a file-object in Pascal.
                   3399:         But it's not certain that a special tree code will really be
                   3400:         necessary for these.  INDIRECT_REF might work for them.  */
                   3401:     case BUFFER_REF:
                   3402:       abort ();
                   3403: 
                   3404:     case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   3405:       if (RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp) == 0)
                   3406:        {
                   3407:          RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp)
                   3408:            = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, tmode, modifier);
                   3409:          cleanups_this_call = tree_cons (0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), cleanups_this_call);
                   3410:          /* That's it for this cleanup.  */
                   3411:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) = 0;
                   3412:        }
                   3413:       return RTL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3414: 
                   3415:     case CALL_EXPR:
                   3416:       /* Check for a built-in function.  */
                   3417:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ADDR_EXPR
                   3418:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
                   3419:          && DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3420:        return expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, tmode, ignore);
                   3421:       /* If this call was expanded already by preexpand_calls,
                   3422:         just return the result we got.  */
                   3423:       if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   3424:        return CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp);
                   3425:       return expand_call (exp, target, ignore, modifier);
                   3426: 
                   3427:     case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   3428:     case NOP_EXPR:
                   3429:     case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   3430:     case REFERENCE_EXPR:
                   3431:       if (TREE_CODE (type) == VOID_TYPE || ignore)
                   3432:        {
                   3433:          expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3434:          return const0_rtx;
                   3435:        }
                   3436:       if (mode == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   3437:        return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3438:       if (TREE_CODE (type) == UNION_TYPE)
                   3439:        {
                   3440:          tree valtype = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   3441:          if (target == 0)
                   3442:            {
                   3443:              if (mode == BLKmode)
                   3444:                {
                   3445:                  if (TYPE_SIZE (type) == 0
                   3446:                      || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   3447:                    abort ();
                   3448:                  target = assign_stack_temp (BLKmode,
                   3449:                                              (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type))
                   3450:                                               + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
                   3451:                                              / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   3452:                }
                   3453:              else
                   3454:                target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3455:            }
                   3456:          if (GET_CODE (target) == MEM)
                   3457:            /* Store data into beginning of memory target.  */
                   3458:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3459:                        change_address (target, TYPE_MODE (valtype), 0), 0);
                   3460:          else if (GET_CODE (target) == REG)
                   3461:            /* Store this field into a union of the proper type.  */
                   3462:            store_field (target, GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (valtype)), 0,
                   3463:                         TYPE_MODE (valtype), TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3464:                         VOIDmode, 0, 1,
                   3465:                         int_size_in_bytes (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3466:          else
                   3467:            abort ();
                   3468: 
                   3469:          /* Return the entire union.  */
                   3470:          return target;
                   3471:        }
                   3472:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, mode, 0);
                   3473:       if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode || GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
                   3474:        return op0;
                   3475:       if (flag_force_mem && GET_CODE (op0) == MEM)
                   3476:        op0 = copy_to_reg (op0);
                   3477: 
                   3478:       if (target == 0)
                   3479:        return convert_to_mode (mode, op0, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3480:       else
                   3481:        convert_move (target, op0, TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3482:       return target;
                   3483: 
                   3484:     case PLUS_EXPR:
                   3485:       /* We come here from MINUS_EXPR when the second operand is a constant. */
                   3486:     plus_expr:
                   3487:       this_optab = add_optab;
                   3488: 
                   3489:       /* If we are adding a constant, an RTL_EXPR that is sp, fp, or ap, and
                   3490:         something else, make sure we add the register to the constant and
                   3491:         then to the other thing.  This case can occur during strength
                   3492:         reduction and doing it this way will produce better code if the
                   3493:         frame pointer or argument pointer is eliminated.
                   3494: 
                   3495:         fold-const.c will ensure that the constant is always in the inner
                   3496:         PLUS_EXPR, so the only case we need to do anything about is if
                   3497:         sp, ap, or fp is our second argument, in which case we must swap
                   3498:         the innermost first argument and our second argument.  */
                   3499: 
                   3500:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == PLUS_EXPR
                   3501:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3502:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == RTL_EXPR
                   3503:          && (RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == frame_pointer_rtx
                   3504:              || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == stack_pointer_rtx
                   3505:              || RTL_EXPR_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == arg_pointer_rtx))
                   3506:        {
                   3507:          tree t = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3508: 
                   3509:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   3510:          TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0) = t;
                   3511:        }
                   3512: 
                   3513:       /* If the result is to be Pmode and we are adding an integer to
                   3514:         something, we might be forming a constant.  So try to use
                   3515:         plus_constant.  If it produces a sum and we can't accept it,
                   3516:         use force_operand.  This allows P = &ARR[const] to generate
                   3517:         efficient code on machines where a SYMBOL_REF is not a valid
                   3518:         address.
                   3519: 
                   3520:         If this is an EXPAND_SUM call, always return the sum.  */
                   3521:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3522:          && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3523:          && (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   3524:              || mode == Pmode))
                   3525:        {
                   3526:          op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), subtarget, VOIDmode,
                   3527:                             EXPAND_SUM);
                   3528:          op1 = plus_constant (op1, TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   3529:          if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3530:            op1 = force_operand (op1, target);
                   3531:          return op1;
                   3532:        }
                   3533: 
                   3534:       else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3535:               && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   3536:               && (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   3537:                   || mode == Pmode))
                   3538:        {
                   3539:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode,
                   3540:                             EXPAND_SUM);
                   3541:          op0 = plus_constant (op0, TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)));
                   3542:          if (modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3543:            op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
                   3544:          return op0;
                   3545:        }
                   3546: 
                   3547:       /* No sense saving up arithmetic to be done
                   3548:         if it's all in the wrong mode to form part of an address.
                   3549:         And force_operand won't know whether to sign-extend or
                   3550:         zero-extend.  */
                   3551:       if ((modifier != EXPAND_SUM && modifier != EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3552:          || mode != Pmode) goto binop;
                   3553: 
                   3554:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3555:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3556:        subtarget = 0;
                   3557: 
                   3558:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3559:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
1.1.1.2 ! root     3560: 
1.1       root     3561:       /* Make sure any term that's a sum with a constant comes last.  */
                   3562:       if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3563:          && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op0, 1)))
                   3564:        {
                   3565:          temp = op0;
                   3566:          op0 = op1;
                   3567:          op1 = temp;
                   3568:        }
                   3569:       /* If adding to a sum including a constant,
                   3570:         associate it to put the constant outside.  */
                   3571:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == PLUS
                   3572:          && CONSTANT_P (XEXP (op1, 1)))
                   3573:        {
1.1.1.2 ! root     3574:          rtx constant_term = const0_rtx;
        !          3575: 
        !          3576:          temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, XEXP (op1, 0), op0);
        !          3577:          if (temp != 0)
        !          3578:            op0 = temp;
        !          3579:          else
        !          3580:            op0 = gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, XEXP (op1, 0), op0);
1.1       root     3581: 
                   3582:          /* Let's also eliminate constants from op0 if possible.  */
1.1.1.2 ! root     3583:          op0 = eliminate_constant_term (op0, &constant_term);
        !          3584: 
        !          3585:          /* CONSTANT_TERM and XEXP (op1, 1) are known to be constant, so
        !          3586:             their sum should be a constant.  Form it into OP1, since the 
        !          3587:             result we want will then be OP0 + OP1.  */
        !          3588: 
        !          3589:          temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, constant_term,
        !          3590:                                            XEXP (op1, 1));
        !          3591:          if (temp != 0)
        !          3592:            op1 = temp;
1.1       root     3593:          else
1.1.1.2 ! root     3594:            op1 = gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, constant_term, XEXP (op1, 1));
1.1       root     3595:        }
1.1.1.2 ! root     3596: 
        !          3597:       /* Put a constant term last and put a multiplication first.  */
        !          3598:       if (CONSTANT_P (op0) || GET_CODE (op1) == MULT)
        !          3599:        temp = op1, op1 = op0, op0 = temp;
        !          3600: 
        !          3601:       temp = simplify_binary_operation (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
        !          3602:       return temp ? temp : gen_rtx (PLUS, mode, op0, op1);
1.1       root     3603: 
                   3604:     case MINUS_EXPR:
                   3605:       /* Handle difference of two symbolic constants,
                   3606:         for the sake of an initializer.  */
                   3607:       if ((modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   3608:          && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3609:          && really_constant_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3610:        {
                   3611:          rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3612:          rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, modifier);
                   3613:          return gen_rtx (MINUS, mode, op0, op1);
                   3614:        }
                   3615:       /* Convert A - const to A + (-const).  */
                   3616:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3617:        {
                   3618:          exp = build (PLUS_EXPR, type, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   3619:                       fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR, type,
                   3620:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   3621:          goto plus_expr;
                   3622:        }
                   3623:       this_optab = sub_optab;
                   3624:       goto binop;
                   3625: 
                   3626:     case MULT_EXPR:
                   3627:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3628:       /* If first operand is constant, swap them.
                   3629:         Thus the following special case checks need only
                   3630:         check the second operand.  */
                   3631:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3632:        {
                   3633:          register tree t1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   3634:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   3635:          TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1) = t1;
                   3636:        }
                   3637: 
                   3638:       /* Attempt to return something suitable for generating an
                   3639:         indexed address, for machines that support that.  */
                   3640: 
                   3641:       if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM && mode == Pmode
                   3642:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3643:          && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3644:        {
                   3645:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, EXPAND_SUM);
                   3646: 
                   3647:          /* Apply distributive law if OP0 is x+c.  */
                   3648:          if (GET_CODE (op0) == PLUS
                   3649:              && GET_CODE (XEXP (op0, 1)) == CONST_INT)
                   3650:            return gen_rtx (PLUS, mode,
                   3651:                            gen_rtx (MULT, mode, XEXP (op0, 0),
                   3652:                                     gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3653:                                              TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))),
                   3654:                            gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3655:                                     (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3656:                                      * INTVAL (XEXP (op0, 1)))));
                   3657: 
                   3658:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   3659:            op0 = force_operand (op0, 0);
                   3660:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   3661:            op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (mode, op0);
                   3662: 
                   3663:          return gen_rtx (MULT, mode, op0,
                   3664:                          gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   3665:                                   TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   3666:        }
                   3667: 
                   3668:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3669:        subtarget = 0;
                   3670: 
                   3671:       /* Check for multiplying things that have been extended
                   3672:         from a narrower type.  If this machine supports multiplying
                   3673:         in that narrower type with a result in the desired type,
                   3674:         do it that way, and avoid the explicit type-conversion.  */
                   3675:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == NOP_EXPR
                   3676:          && TREE_CODE (type) == INTEGER_TYPE
                   3677:          && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3678:              < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   3679:          && ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   3680:               && int_fits_type_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   3681:                                   TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3682:               /* Don't use a widening multiply if a shift will do.  */
                   3683:               && ((GET_MODE_BITSIZE (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))))
                   3684:                    > HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   3685:                   || exact_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) < 0))
                   3686:              ||
                   3687:              (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == NOP_EXPR
                   3688:               && (TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
                   3689:                   ==
                   3690:                   TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0))))
                   3691:               /* If both operands are extended, they must either both
                   3692:                  be zero-extended or both be sign-extended.  */
                   3693:               && (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)))
                   3694:                   ==
                   3695:                   TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))))))
                   3696:        {
                   3697:          enum machine_mode innermode
                   3698:            = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)));
                   3699:          this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   3700:                        ? umul_widen_optab : smul_widen_optab);
                   3701:          if (mode == GET_MODE_WIDER_MODE (innermode)
                   3702:              && this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   3703:            {
                   3704:              op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   3705:                                 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3706:              if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST)
                   3707:                op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3708:              else
                   3709:                op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0),
                   3710:                                   0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3711:              goto binop2;
                   3712:            }
                   3713:        }
                   3714:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3715:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3716:       return expand_mult (mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3717: 
                   3718:     case TRUNC_DIV_EXPR:
                   3719:     case FLOOR_DIV_EXPR:
                   3720:     case CEIL_DIV_EXPR:
                   3721:     case ROUND_DIV_EXPR:
                   3722:     case EXACT_DIV_EXPR:
                   3723:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3724:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3725:        subtarget = 0;
                   3726:       /* Possible optimization: compute the dividend with EXPAND_SUM
                   3727:         then if the divisor is constant can optimize the case
                   3728:         where some terms of the dividend have coeffs divisible by it.  */
                   3729:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3730:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3731:       return expand_divmod (0, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3732: 
                   3733:     case RDIV_EXPR:
                   3734:       this_optab = flodiv_optab;
                   3735:       goto binop;
                   3736: 
                   3737:     case TRUNC_MOD_EXPR:
                   3738:     case FLOOR_MOD_EXPR:
                   3739:     case CEIL_MOD_EXPR:
                   3740:     case ROUND_MOD_EXPR:
                   3741:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3742:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3743:        subtarget = 0;
                   3744:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3745:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3746:       return expand_divmod (1, code, mode, op0, op1, target, unsignedp);
                   3747: 
                   3748:     case FIX_ROUND_EXPR:
                   3749:     case FIX_FLOOR_EXPR:
                   3750:     case FIX_CEIL_EXPR:
                   3751:       abort ();                        /* Not used for C.  */
                   3752: 
                   3753:     case FIX_TRUNC_EXPR:
                   3754:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3755:       if (target == 0)
                   3756:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3757:       expand_fix (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   3758:       return target;
                   3759: 
                   3760:     case FLOAT_EXPR:
                   3761:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3762:       if (target == 0)
                   3763:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3764:       /* expand_float can't figure out what to do if FROM has VOIDmode.
                   3765:         So give it the correct mode.  With -O, cse will optimize this.  */
                   3766:       if (GET_MODE (op0) == VOIDmode)
                   3767:        op0 = copy_to_mode_reg (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))),
                   3768:                                op0);
                   3769:       expand_float (target, op0,
                   3770:                    TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))));
                   3771:       return target;
                   3772: 
                   3773:     case NEGATE_EXPR:
                   3774:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3775:       temp = expand_unop (mode, neg_optab, op0, target, 0);
                   3776:       if (temp == 0)
                   3777:        abort ();
                   3778:       return temp;
                   3779: 
                   3780:     case ABS_EXPR:
                   3781:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3782: 
                   3783:       /* Unsigned abs is simply the operand.  Testing here means we don't
                   3784:         risk generating incorrect code below.  */
                   3785:       if (TREE_UNSIGNED (type))
                   3786:        return op0;
                   3787: 
                   3788:       /* First try to do it with a special abs instruction.  */
                   3789:       temp = expand_unop (mode, abs_optab, op0, target, 0);
                   3790:       if (temp != 0)
                   3791:        return temp;
                   3792: 
                   3793:       /* If this machine has expensive jumps, we can do integer absolute
                   3794:         value of X as (((signed) x >> (W-1)) ^ x) - ((signed) x >> (W-1)),
                   3795:         where W is the width of MODE.  */
                   3796: 
                   3797:       if (GET_MODE_CLASS (mode) == MODE_INT && BRANCH_COST >= 2)
                   3798:        {
                   3799:          rtx extended = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, mode, op0,
                   3800:                                       size_int (GET_MODE_BITSIZE (mode) - 1),
                   3801:                                       0, 0);
                   3802: 
                   3803:          temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, extended, op0, target, 0,
                   3804:                               OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3805:          if (temp != 0)
                   3806:            temp = expand_binop (mode, sub_optab, temp, extended, target, 0,
                   3807:                                 OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3808: 
                   3809:          if (temp != 0)
                   3810:            return temp;
                   3811:        }
                   3812: 
                   3813:       /* If that does not win, use conditional jump and negate.  */
                   3814:       target = original_target;
                   3815:       temp = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3816:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   3817:          || (GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3818:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3819:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3820:       emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3821:       emit_cmp_insn (target,
                   3822:                     expand_expr (convert (type, integer_zero_node),
                   3823:                                  0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   3824:                     GE, 0, mode, 0, 0);
                   3825:       NO_DEFER_POP;
                   3826:       emit_jump_insn (gen_bge (temp));
                   3827:       op0 = expand_unop (mode, neg_optab, target, target, 0);
                   3828:       if (op0 != target)
                   3829:        emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3830:       emit_label (temp);
                   3831:       OK_DEFER_POP;
                   3832:       return target;
                   3833: 
                   3834:     case MAX_EXPR:
                   3835:     case MIN_EXPR:
                   3836:       target = original_target;
                   3837:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3838:          || (GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3839:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3840:        target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   3841:       op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3842:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3843: 
                   3844:       /* First try to do it with a special MIN or MAX instruction.
                   3845:         If that does not win, use a conditional jump to select the proper
                   3846:         value.  */
                   3847:       this_optab = (TREE_UNSIGNED (type)
                   3848:                    ? (code == MIN_EXPR ? umin_optab : umax_optab)
                   3849:                    : (code == MIN_EXPR ? smin_optab : smax_optab));
                   3850: 
                   3851:       temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target, unsignedp,
                   3852:                           OPTAB_WIDEN);
                   3853:       if (temp != 0)
                   3854:        return temp;
                   3855: 
                   3856:       if (target != op0)
                   3857:        emit_move_insn (target, op0);
                   3858:       op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3859:       if (code == MAX_EXPR)
                   3860:        temp = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3861:                ? compare_from_rtx (target, op1, GEU, 1, mode, 0, 0)
                   3862:                : compare_from_rtx (target, op1, GE, 0, mode, 0, 0));
                   3863:       else
                   3864:        temp = (TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3865:                ? compare_from_rtx (target, op1, LEU, 1, mode, 0, 0)
                   3866:                : compare_from_rtx (target, op1, LE, 0, mode, 0, 0));
                   3867:       if (temp == const0_rtx)
                   3868:        emit_move_insn (target, op1);
                   3869:       else if (temp != const_true_rtx)
                   3870:        {
                   3871:          if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (temp)] != 0)
                   3872:            emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (temp)]) (op0));
                   3873:          else
                   3874:            abort ();
                   3875:          emit_move_insn (target, op1);
                   3876:        }
                   3877:       emit_label (op0);
                   3878:       return target;
                   3879: 
                   3880: /* ??? Can optimize when the operand of this is a bitwise operation,
                   3881:    by using a different bitwise operation.  */
                   3882:     case BIT_NOT_EXPR:
                   3883:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3884:       temp = expand_unop (mode, one_cmpl_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   3885:       if (temp == 0)
                   3886:        abort ();
                   3887:       return temp;
                   3888: 
                   3889:     case FFS_EXPR:
                   3890:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3891:       temp = expand_unop (mode, ffs_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   3892:       if (temp == 0)
                   3893:        abort ();
                   3894:       return temp;
                   3895: 
                   3896: /* ??? Can optimize bitwise operations with one arg constant.
                   3897:    Can optimize (a bitwise1 n) bitwise2 (a bitwise3 b)
                   3898:    and (a bitwise1 b) bitwise2 b (etc)
                   3899:    but that is probably not worth while.  */
                   3900: 
                   3901: /* BIT_AND_EXPR is for bitwise anding.
                   3902:    TRUTH_AND_EXPR is for anding two boolean values
                   3903:    when we want in all cases to compute both of them.
                   3904:    In general it is fastest to do TRUTH_AND_EXPR by
                   3905:    computing both operands as actual zero-or-1 values
                   3906:    and then bitwise anding.  In cases where there cannot
                   3907:    be any side effects, better code would be made by
                   3908:    treating TRUTH_AND_EXPR like TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR;
                   3909:    but the question is how to recognize those cases.  */
                   3910: 
                   3911:     case TRUTH_AND_EXPR:
                   3912:     case BIT_AND_EXPR:
                   3913:       this_optab = and_optab;
                   3914:       goto binop;
                   3915: 
                   3916: /* See comment above about TRUTH_AND_EXPR; it applies here too.  */
                   3917:     case TRUTH_OR_EXPR:
                   3918:     case BIT_IOR_EXPR:
                   3919:       this_optab = ior_optab;
                   3920:       goto binop;
                   3921: 
                   3922:     case BIT_XOR_EXPR:
                   3923:       this_optab = xor_optab;
                   3924:       goto binop;
                   3925: 
                   3926:     case LSHIFT_EXPR:
                   3927:     case RSHIFT_EXPR:
                   3928:     case LROTATE_EXPR:
                   3929:     case RROTATE_EXPR:
                   3930:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3931:       if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   3932:        subtarget = 0;
                   3933:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3934:       return expand_shift (code, mode, op0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target,
                   3935:                           unsignedp);
                   3936: 
                   3937: /* Could determine the answer when only additive constants differ.
                   3938:    Also, the addition of one can be handled by changing the condition.  */
                   3939:     case LT_EXPR:
                   3940:     case LE_EXPR:
                   3941:     case GT_EXPR:
                   3942:     case GE_EXPR:
                   3943:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   3944:     case NE_EXPR:
                   3945:       preexpand_calls (exp);
                   3946:       temp = do_store_flag (exp, target, tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode, 0);
                   3947:       if (temp != 0)
                   3948:        return temp;
                   3949:       /* For foo != 0, load foo, and if it is nonzero load 1 instead. */
                   3950:       if (code == NE_EXPR && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   3951:          && original_target
                   3952:          && GET_CODE (original_target) == REG
                   3953:          && (GET_MODE (original_target)
                   3954:              == TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   3955:        {
                   3956:          temp = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), original_target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3957:          if (temp != original_target)
                   3958:            temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   3959:          op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3960:          emit_cmp_insn (temp, const0_rtx, EQ, 0,
                   3961:                         GET_MODE (temp), unsignedp, 0);
                   3962:          emit_jump_insn (gen_beq (op1));
                   3963:          emit_move_insn (temp, const1_rtx);
                   3964:          emit_label (op1);
                   3965:          return temp;
                   3966:        }
                   3967:       /* If no set-flag instruction, must generate a conditional
                   3968:         store into a temporary variable.  Drop through
                   3969:         and handle this like && and ||.  */
                   3970: 
                   3971:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   3972:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   3973:       if (target == 0 || ! safe_from_p (target, exp)
                   3974:          /* Make sure we don't have a hard reg (such as function's return
                   3975:             value) live across basic blocks, if not optimizing.  */
                   3976:          || (!optimize && GET_CODE (target) == REG
                   3977:              && REGNO (target) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   3978:        target = gen_reg_rtx (tmode != VOIDmode ? tmode : mode);
                   3979:       emit_clr_insn (target);
                   3980:       op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   3981:       jumpifnot (exp, op1);
                   3982:       emit_0_to_1_insn (target);
                   3983:       emit_label (op1);
                   3984:       return target;
                   3985: 
                   3986:     case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
                   3987:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3988:       /* The parser is careful to generate TRUTH_NOT_EXPR
                   3989:         only with operands that are always zero or one.  */
                   3990:       temp = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0,
                   3991:                           gen_rtx (CONST_INT, mode, 1),
                   3992:                           target, 1, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   3993:       if (temp == 0)
                   3994:        abort ();
                   3995:       return temp;
                   3996: 
                   3997:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   3998:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   3999:       emit_queue ();
                   4000:       return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   4001:                          (ignore ? const0_rtx : target),
                   4002:                          VOIDmode, 0);
                   4003: 
                   4004:     case COND_EXPR:
                   4005:       {
                   4006:        /* Note that COND_EXPRs whose type is a structure or union
                   4007:           are required to be constructed to contain assignments of
                   4008:           a temporary variable, so that we can evaluate them here
                   4009:           for side effect only.  If type is void, we must do likewise.  */
                   4010: 
                   4011:        /* If an arm of the branch requires a cleanup,
                   4012:           only that cleanup is performed.  */
                   4013: 
                   4014:        tree singleton = 0;
                   4015:        tree binary_op = 0, unary_op = 0;
                   4016:        tree old_cleanups = cleanups_this_call;
                   4017:        cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4018: 
                   4019:        /* If this is (A ? 1 : 0) and A is a condition, just evaluate it and
                   4020:           convert it to our mode, if necessary.  */
                   4021:        if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4022:            && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4023:            && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
                   4024:          {
                   4025:            op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), target, mode, modifier);
                   4026:            if (GET_MODE (op0) == mode)
                   4027:              return op0;
                   4028:            if (target == 0)
                   4029:              target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4030:            convert_move (target, op0, unsignedp);
                   4031:            return target;
                   4032:          }
                   4033: 
                   4034:        /* If we are not to produce a result, we have no target.  Otherwise,
                   4035:           if a target was specified use it; it will not be used as an
                   4036:           intermediate target unless it is safe.  If no target, use a 
                   4037:           temporary.  */
                   4038: 
                   4039:        if (mode == VOIDmode || ignore)
                   4040:          temp = 0;
                   4041:        else if (original_target
                   4042:                 && safe_from_p (original_target, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
                   4043:          temp = original_target;
                   4044:        else if (mode == BLKmode)
                   4045:          {
                   4046:            if (TYPE_SIZE (type) == 0
                   4047:                || TREE_CODE (TYPE_SIZE (type)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4048:              abort ();
                   4049:            temp = assign_stack_temp (BLKmode,
                   4050:                                      (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TYPE_SIZE (type))
                   4051:                                       + BITS_PER_UNIT - 1)
                   4052:                                      / BITS_PER_UNIT, 0);
                   4053:          }
                   4054:        else
                   4055:          temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4056: 
                   4057:        /* Check for X ? A + B : A.  If we have this, we can copy
                   4058:           A to the output and conditionally add B.  Similarly for unary
                   4059:           operations.  Don't do this if X has side-effects because
                   4060:           those side effects might affect A or B and the "?" operation is
                   4061:           a sequence point in ANSI.  (We test for side effects later.)  */
                   4062: 
                   4063:        if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '2'
                   4064:            && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4065:                                TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
                   4066:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4067:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '2'
                   4068:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   4069:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
                   4070:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), binary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
                   4071:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == '1'
                   4072:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4073:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0), 0))
                   4074:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4075:        else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == '1'
                   4076:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   4077:                                     TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0), 0))
                   4078:          singleton = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), unary_op = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2);
                   4079: 
                   4080:        /* If we had X ? A + 1 : A and we can do the test of X as a store-flag
                   4081:           operation, do this as A + (X != 0).  Similarly for other simple
                   4082:           binary operators.  */
                   4083:        if (singleton && binary_op
                   4084:            && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4085:            && (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR
                   4086:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR
                   4087:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4088:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_XOR_EXPR
                   4089:                || TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
                   4090:            && integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1))
                   4091:            && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<')
                   4092:          {
                   4093:            rtx result;
                   4094:            optab boptab = (TREE_CODE (binary_op) == PLUS_EXPR ? add_optab
                   4095:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == MINUS_EXPR ? sub_optab
                   4096:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? ior_optab
                   4097:                            : TREE_CODE (binary_op) == BIT_XOR_EXPR ? xor_optab
                   4098:                            : and_optab);
                   4099: 
                   4100:            /* If we had X ? A : A + 1, do this as A + (X == 0).
                   4101: 
                   4102:               We have to invert the truth value here and then put it
                   4103:               back later if do_store_flag fails.  We cannot simply copy
                   4104:               TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0) to another variable and modify that
                   4105:               because invert_truthvalue can modify the tree pointed to
                   4106:               by its argument.  */
                   4107:            if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4108:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)
                   4109:                = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4110: 
                   4111:            result = do_store_flag (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   4112:                                    safe_from_p (temp, singleton) ? temp : 0,
                   4113:                                    mode, BRANCH_COST <= 1);
                   4114: 
                   4115:            if (result)
                   4116:              {
                   4117:                op1 = expand_expr (singleton, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4118:                return expand_binop (mode, boptab, op1, result, temp,
                   4119:                                     unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4120:              }
                   4121:            else if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4122:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)
                   4123:                = invert_truthvalue (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4124:          }
                   4125:            
                   4126:        NO_DEFER_POP;
                   4127:        op0 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4128: 
                   4129:        if (singleton && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))
                   4130:          {
                   4131:            if (temp != 0)
                   4132:              {
                   4133:                /* If the target conflicts with the other operand of the
                   4134:                   binary op, we can't use it.  Also, we can't use the target
                   4135:                   if it is a hard register, because evaluating the condition
                   4136:                   might clobber it.  */
                   4137:                if ((binary_op
                   4138:                     && ! safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)))
                   4139:                    || (GET_CODE (temp) == REG
                   4140:                        && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   4141:                  temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4142:                store_expr (singleton, temp, 0);
                   4143:              }
                   4144:            else
                   4145:              expand_expr (singleton, ignore ? const1_rtx : 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4146:            if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4147:              {
                   4148:                sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4149:                cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4150:              }
                   4151:            if (singleton == TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4152:              jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4153:            else
                   4154:              jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4155: 
                   4156:            if (binary_op && temp == 0)
                   4157:              /* Just touch the other operand.  */
                   4158:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1),
                   4159:                           ignore ? const0_rtx : 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4160:            else if (binary_op)
                   4161:              store_expr (build (TREE_CODE (binary_op), type,
                   4162:                                 make_tree (type, temp),
                   4163:                                 TREE_OPERAND (binary_op, 1)),
                   4164:                          temp, 0);
                   4165:            else
                   4166:              store_expr (build1 (TREE_CODE (unary_op), type,
                   4167:                                  make_tree (type, temp)),
                   4168:                          temp, 0);
                   4169:            op1 = op0;
                   4170:          }
                   4171: #if 0
                   4172:        /* This is now done in jump.c and is better done there because it
                   4173:           produces shorter register lifetimes.  */
                   4174:           
                   4175:        /* Check for both possibilities either constants or variables
                   4176:           in registers (but not the same as the target!).  If so, can
                   4177:           save branches by assigning one, branching, and assigning the
                   4178:           other.  */
                   4179:        else if (temp && GET_MODE (temp) != BLKmode
                   4180:                 && (TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4181:                     || ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == PARM_DECL
                   4182:                          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == VAR_DECL)
                   4183:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   4184:                         && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))) == REG
                   4185:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != temp))
                   4186:                 && (TREE_CONSTANT (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4187:                     || ((TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == PARM_DECL
                   4188:                          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) == VAR_DECL)
                   4189:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4190:                         && GET_CODE (DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))) == REG
                   4191:                         && DECL_RTL (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)) != temp)))
                   4192:          {
                   4193:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4194:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4195:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4196:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4197:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4198:            op1 = op0;
                   4199:          }
                   4200: #endif
                   4201:        /* Check for A op 0 ? A : FOO and A op 0 ? FOO : A where OP is any
                   4202:           comparison operator.  If we have one of these cases, set the
                   4203:           output to A, branch on A (cse will merge these two references),
                   4204:           then set the output to FOO.  */
                   4205:        else if (temp
                   4206:                 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
                   4207:                 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
                   4208:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   4209:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0)
                   4210:                 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4211:                 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   4212:          {
                   4213:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4214:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4215:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4216:            jumpif (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4217:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4218:            op1 = op0;
                   4219:          }
                   4220:        else if (temp
                   4221:                 && TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))) == '<'
                   4222:                 && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 1))
                   4223:                 && operand_equal_p (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0),
                   4224:                                     TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), 0)
                   4225:                 && ! TREE_SIDE_EFFECTS (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))
                   4226:                 && safe_from_p (temp, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   4227:          {
                   4228:            if (GET_CODE (temp) == REG && REGNO (temp) < FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER)
                   4229:              temp = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   4230:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4231:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4232:            store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4233:            op1 = op0;
                   4234:          }
                   4235:        else
                   4236:          {
                   4237:            op1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4238:            jumpifnot (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), op0);
                   4239:            if (temp != 0)
                   4240:              store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), temp, 0);
                   4241:            else
                   4242:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), ignore ? const0_rtx : 0,
                   4243:                           VOIDmode, 0);
                   4244:            if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4245:              {
                   4246:                sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4247:                cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4248:              }
                   4249: 
                   4250:            emit_queue ();
                   4251:            emit_jump_insn (gen_jump (op1));
                   4252:            emit_barrier ();
                   4253:            emit_label (op0);
                   4254:            if (temp != 0)
                   4255:              store_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), temp, 0);
                   4256:            else
                   4257:              expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2), ignore ? const0_rtx : 0,
                   4258:                           VOIDmode, 0);
                   4259:          }
                   4260: 
                   4261:        if (cleanups_this_call)
                   4262:          {
                   4263:            sorry ("aggregate value in COND_EXPR");
                   4264:            cleanups_this_call = 0;
                   4265:          }
                   4266: 
                   4267:        emit_queue ();
                   4268:        emit_label (op1);
                   4269:        OK_DEFER_POP;
                   4270:        cleanups_this_call = old_cleanups;
                   4271:        return temp;
                   4272:       }
                   4273: 
                   4274:     case TARGET_EXPR:
                   4275:       {
                   4276:        /* Something needs to be initialized, but we didn't know
                   4277:           where that thing was when building the tree.  For example,
                   4278:           it could be the return value of a function, or a parameter
                   4279:           to a function which lays down in the stack, or a temporary
                   4280:           variable which must be passed by reference.
                   4281: 
                   4282:           We guarantee that the expression will either be constructed
                   4283:           or copied into our original target.  */
                   4284: 
                   4285:        tree slot = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4286: 
                   4287:        if (TREE_CODE (slot) != VAR_DECL)
                   4288:          abort ();
                   4289: 
                   4290:        if (target == 0)
                   4291:          {
                   4292:            if (DECL_RTL (slot) != 0)
                   4293:              target = DECL_RTL (slot);
                   4294:            else
                   4295:              {
                   4296:                target = assign_stack_temp (mode, int_size_in_bytes (type), 0);
                   4297:                /* All temp slots at this level must not conflict.  */
                   4298:                preserve_temp_slots (target);
                   4299:                DECL_RTL (slot) = target;
                   4300:              }
                   4301: 
                   4302: #if 0
                   4303:            /* Since SLOT is not known to the called function
                   4304:               to belong to its stack frame, we must build an explicit
                   4305:               cleanup.  This case occurs when we must build up a reference
                   4306:               to pass the reference as an argument.  In this case,
                   4307:               it is very likely that such a reference need not be
                   4308:               built here.  */
                   4309: 
                   4310:            if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) == 0)
                   4311:              TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2) = maybe_build_cleanup (slot);
                   4312:            if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2))
                   4313:              cleanups_this_call = tree_cons (0, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   4314:                                                 cleanups_this_call);
                   4315: #endif
                   4316:          }
                   4317:        else
                   4318:          {
                   4319:            /* This case does occur, when expanding a parameter which
                   4320:               needs to be constructed on the stack.  The target
                   4321:               is the actual stack address that we want to initialize.
                   4322:               The function we call will perform the cleanup in this case.  */
                   4323: 
                   4324:            DECL_RTL (slot) = target;
                   4325:          }
                   4326: 
                   4327:        return expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), target, tmode, modifier);
                   4328:       }
                   4329: 
                   4330:     case INIT_EXPR:
                   4331:       {
                   4332:        tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4333:        tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4334:        tree noncopied_parts = 0;
                   4335:        tree lhs_type = TREE_TYPE (lhs);
                   4336: 
                   4337:        temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
                   4338:        if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type) != 0 && !fixed_type_p (rhs))
                   4339:          noncopied_parts = init_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs),
                   4340:                                                  TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type));
                   4341:        while (noncopied_parts != 0)
                   4342:          {
                   4343:            expand_assignment (TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts),
                   4344:                               TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts), 0, 0);
                   4345:            noncopied_parts = TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts);
                   4346:          }
                   4347:        return temp;
                   4348:       }
                   4349: 
                   4350:     case MODIFY_EXPR:
                   4351:       {
                   4352:        /* If lhs is complex, expand calls in rhs before computing it.
                   4353:           That's so we don't compute a pointer and save it over a call.
                   4354:           If lhs is simple, compute it first so we can give it as a
                   4355:           target if the rhs is just a call.  This avoids an extra temp and copy
                   4356:           and that prevents a partial-subsumption which makes bad code.
                   4357:           Actually we could treat component_ref's of vars like vars.  */
                   4358: 
                   4359:        tree lhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4360:        tree rhs = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4361:        tree noncopied_parts = 0;
                   4362:        tree lhs_type = TREE_TYPE (lhs);
                   4363: 
                   4364:        temp = 0;
                   4365: 
                   4366:        if (TREE_CODE (lhs) != VAR_DECL
                   4367:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) != RESULT_DECL
                   4368:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) != PARM_DECL)
                   4369:          preexpand_calls (exp);
                   4370: 
                   4371:        /* Check for |= or &= of a bitfield of size one into another bitfield
                   4372:           of size 1.  In this case, (unless we need the result of the
                   4373:           assignment) we can do this more efficiently with a
                   4374:           test followed by an assignment, if necessary.
                   4375: 
                   4376:           ??? At this point, we can't get a BIT_FIELD_REF here.  But if
                   4377:           things change so we do, this code should be enhanced to
                   4378:           support it.  */
                   4379:        if (ignore
                   4380:            && TREE_CODE (lhs) == COMPONENT_REF
                   4381:            && (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4382:                || TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR)
                   4383:            && TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 0) == lhs
                   4384:            && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1)) == COMPONENT_REF
                   4385:            && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (lhs, 1))) == 1
                   4386:            && TREE_INT_CST_LOW (DECL_SIZE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1), 1))) == 1)
                   4387:          {
                   4388:            rtx label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   4389: 
                   4390:            do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (rhs, 1),
                   4391:                     TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR ? label : 0,
                   4392:                     TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_AND_EXPR ? label : 0);
                   4393:            expand_assignment (lhs, convert (TREE_TYPE (rhs),
                   4394:                                             (TREE_CODE (rhs) == BIT_IOR_EXPR
                   4395:                                              ? integer_one_node
                   4396:                                              : integer_zero_node)),
                   4397:                               0, 0);
                   4398:            emit_label (label);
                   4399:            return const0_rtx;
                   4400:          }
                   4401: 
                   4402:        if (TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type) != 0
                   4403:            && ! (fixed_type_p (lhs) && fixed_type_p (rhs)))
                   4404:          noncopied_parts = save_noncopied_parts (stabilize_reference (lhs),
                   4405:                                                  TYPE_NONCOPIED_PARTS (lhs_type));
                   4406: 
                   4407:        temp = expand_assignment (lhs, rhs, ! ignore, original_target != 0);
                   4408:        while (noncopied_parts != 0)
                   4409:          {
                   4410:            expand_assignment (TREE_PURPOSE (noncopied_parts),
                   4411:                               TREE_VALUE (noncopied_parts), 0, 0);
                   4412:            noncopied_parts = TREE_CHAIN (noncopied_parts);
                   4413:          }
                   4414:        return temp;
                   4415:       }
                   4416: 
                   4417:     case PREINCREMENT_EXPR:
                   4418:     case PREDECREMENT_EXPR:
                   4419:       return expand_increment (exp, 0);
                   4420: 
                   4421:     case POSTINCREMENT_EXPR:
                   4422:     case POSTDECREMENT_EXPR:
                   4423:       /* Faster to treat as pre-increment if result is not used.  */
                   4424:       return expand_increment (exp, ! ignore);
                   4425: 
                   4426:     case ADDR_EXPR:
                   4427:       /* Are we taking the address of a nested function?  */
                   4428:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == FUNCTION_DECL
                   4429:          && decl_function_context (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) != 0)
                   4430:        {
                   4431:          op0 = trampoline_address (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   4432:          op0 = force_operand (op0, target);
                   4433:        }
                   4434:       else
                   4435:        {
                   4436:          op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode,
                   4437:                             (modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER
                   4438:                              ? modifier : EXPAND_CONST_ADDRESS));
                   4439:          if (GET_CODE (op0) != MEM)
                   4440:            abort ();
                   4441:   
                   4442:          if (modifier == EXPAND_SUM || modifier == EXPAND_INITIALIZER)
                   4443:            return XEXP (op0, 0);
                   4444:          op0 = force_operand (XEXP (op0, 0), target);
                   4445:        }
                   4446:       if (flag_force_addr && GET_CODE (op0) != REG)
                   4447:        return force_reg (Pmode, op0);
                   4448:       return op0;
                   4449: 
                   4450:     case ENTRY_VALUE_EXPR:
                   4451:       abort ();
                   4452: 
                   4453:     case ERROR_MARK:
                   4454:       return const0_rtx;
                   4455: 
                   4456:     default:
                   4457:       return (*lang_expand_expr) (exp, target, tmode, modifier);
                   4458:     }
                   4459: 
                   4460:   /* Here to do an ordinary binary operator, generating an instruction
                   4461:      from the optab already placed in `this_optab'.  */
                   4462:  binop:
                   4463:   preexpand_calls (exp);
                   4464:   if (! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   4465:     subtarget = 0;
                   4466:   op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4467:   op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4468:  binop2:
                   4469:   temp = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, op0, op1, target,
                   4470:                       unsignedp, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4471:   if (temp == 0)
                   4472:     abort ();
                   4473:   return temp;
                   4474: }
                   4475: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     4476: /* Return the alignment in bits of EXP, a pointer valued expression.
        !          4477:    But don't return more than MAX_ALIGN no matter what.
1.1       root     4478:    The alignment returned is, by default, the alignment of the thing that
                   4479:    EXP points to (if it is not a POINTER_TYPE, 0 is returned).
                   4480: 
                   4481:    Otherwise, look at the expression to see if we can do better, i.e., if the
                   4482:    expression is actually pointing at an object whose alignment is tighter.  */
                   4483: 
                   4484: static int
                   4485: get_pointer_alignment (exp, max_align)
                   4486:      tree exp;
                   4487:      unsigned max_align;
                   4488: {
                   4489:   unsigned align, inner;
                   4490: 
                   4491:   if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4492:     return 0;
                   4493: 
                   4494:   align = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   4495:   align = MIN (align, max_align);
                   4496: 
                   4497:   while (1)
                   4498:     {
                   4499:       switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   4500:        {
                   4501:        case NOP_EXPR:
                   4502:        case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   4503:        case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   4504:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4505:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (exp)) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4506:            return align;
                   4507:          inner = TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (TREE_TYPE (exp)));
                   4508:          inner = MIN (inner, max_align);
                   4509:          align = MAX (align, inner);
                   4510:          break;
                   4511: 
                   4512:        case PLUS_EXPR:
                   4513:          /* If sum of pointer + int, restrict our maximum alignment to that
                   4514:             imposed by the integer.  If not, we can't do any better than
                   4515:             ALIGN.  */
                   4516:          if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4517:            return align;
                   4518: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     4519:          while (((TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) * BITS_PER_UNIT)
        !          4520:                  & (max_align - 1))
        !          4521:                 != 0)
1.1       root     4522:            max_align >>= 1;
                   4523: 
                   4524:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4525:          break;
                   4526: 
                   4527:        case ADDR_EXPR:
                   4528:          /* See what we are pointing at and look at its alignment.  */
                   4529:          exp = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   4530:          if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)) == 'd')
                   4531:            align = MAX (align, DECL_ALIGN (exp));
                   4532: #ifdef CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
                   4533:          else if (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp)) == 'c')
                   4534:            align = CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (exp, align);
                   4535: #endif
                   4536:          return MIN (align, max_align);
                   4537: 
                   4538:        default:
                   4539:          return align;
                   4540:        }
                   4541:     }
                   4542: }
                   4543: 
                   4544: /* Return the tree node and offset if a given argument corresponds to
                   4545:    a string constant.  */
                   4546: 
                   4547: static tree
                   4548: string_constant (arg, ptr_offset)
                   4549:      tree arg;
                   4550:      tree *ptr_offset;
                   4551: {
                   4552:   STRIP_NOPS (arg);
                   4553: 
                   4554:   if (TREE_CODE (arg) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4555:       && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4556:     {
                   4557:       *ptr_offset = integer_zero_node;
                   4558:       return TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
                   4559:     }
                   4560:   else if (TREE_CODE (arg) == PLUS_EXPR)
                   4561:     {
                   4562:       tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 0);
                   4563:       tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg, 1);
                   4564: 
                   4565:       STRIP_NOPS (arg0);
                   4566:       STRIP_NOPS (arg1);
                   4567: 
                   4568:       if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4569:          && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4570:        {
                   4571:          *ptr_offset = arg1;
                   4572:          return TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
                   4573:        }
                   4574:       else if (TREE_CODE (arg1) == ADDR_EXPR
                   4575:               && TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0)) == STRING_CST)
                   4576:        {
                   4577:          *ptr_offset = arg0;
                   4578:          return TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
                   4579:        }
                   4580:     }
                   4581: 
                   4582:   return 0;
                   4583: }
                   4584: 
                   4585: /* Compute the length of a C string.  TREE_STRING_LENGTH is not the right
                   4586:    way, because it could contain a zero byte in the middle.
                   4587:    TREE_STRING_LENGTH is the size of the character array, not the string.
                   4588: 
                   4589:    Unfortunately, string_constant can't access the values of const char
                   4590:    arrays with initializers, so neither can we do so here.  */
                   4591: 
                   4592: static tree
                   4593: c_strlen (src)
                   4594:      tree src;
                   4595: {
                   4596:   tree offset_node;
                   4597:   int offset, max;
                   4598:   char *ptr;
                   4599: 
                   4600:   src = string_constant (src, &offset_node);
                   4601:   if (src == 0)
                   4602:     return 0;
                   4603:   max = TREE_STRING_LENGTH (src);
                   4604:   ptr = TREE_STRING_POINTER (src);
                   4605:   if (offset_node && TREE_CODE (offset_node) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4606:     {
                   4607:       /* If the string has an internal zero byte (e.g., "foo\0bar"), we can't
                   4608:         compute the offset to the following null if we don't know where to
                   4609:         start searching for it.  */
                   4610:       int i;
                   4611:       for (i = 0; i < max; i++)
                   4612:        if (ptr[i] == 0)
                   4613:          return 0;
                   4614:       /* We don't know the starting offset, but we do know that the string
                   4615:         has no internal zero bytes.  We can assume that the offset falls
                   4616:         within the bounds of the string; otherwise, the programmer deserves
                   4617:         what he gets.  Subtract the offset from the length of the string,
                   4618:         and return that.  */
                   4619:       /* This would perhaps not be valid if we were dealing with named
                   4620:          arrays in addition to literal string constants.  */
                   4621:       return size_binop (MINUS_EXPR, size_int (max), offset_node);
                   4622:     }
                   4623: 
                   4624:   /* We have a known offset into the string.  Start searching there for
                   4625:      a null character.  */
                   4626:   if (offset_node == 0)
                   4627:     offset = 0;
                   4628:   else
                   4629:     {
                   4630:       /* Did we get a long long offset?  If so, punt.  */
                   4631:       if (TREE_INT_CST_HIGH (offset_node) != 0)
                   4632:        return 0;
                   4633:       offset = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (offset_node);
                   4634:     }
                   4635:   /* If the offset is known to be out of bounds, warn, and call strlen at
                   4636:      runtime.  */
                   4637:   if (offset < 0 || offset > max)
                   4638:     {
                   4639:       warning ("offset outside bounds of constant string");
                   4640:       return 0;
                   4641:     }
                   4642:   /* Use strlen to search for the first zero byte.  Since any strings
                   4643:      constructed with build_string will have nulls appended, we win even
                   4644:      if we get handed something like (char[4])"abcd".
                   4645: 
                   4646:      Since OFFSET is our starting index into the string, no further
                   4647:      calculation is needed.  */
                   4648:   return size_int (strlen (ptr + offset));
                   4649: }
                   4650: 
                   4651: /* Expand an expression EXP that calls a built-in function,
                   4652:    with result going to TARGET if that's convenient
                   4653:    (and in mode MODE if that's convenient).
                   4654:    SUBTARGET may be used as the target for computing one of EXP's operands.
                   4655:    IGNORE is nonzero if the value is to be ignored.  */
                   4656: 
                   4657: static rtx
                   4658: expand_builtin (exp, target, subtarget, mode, ignore)
                   4659:      tree exp;
                   4660:      rtx target;
                   4661:      rtx subtarget;
                   4662:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   4663:      int ignore;
                   4664: {
                   4665:   tree fndecl = TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0);
                   4666:   tree arglist = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   4667:   rtx op0;
                   4668:   enum machine_mode value_mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   4669: 
                   4670:   switch (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl))
                   4671:     {
                   4672:     case BUILT_IN_ABS:
                   4673:     case BUILT_IN_LABS:
                   4674:     case BUILT_IN_FABS:
                   4675:       /* build_function_call changes these into ABS_EXPR.  */
                   4676:       abort ();
                   4677: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     4678:     case BUILT_IN_FSQRT:
        !          4679:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
        !          4680:       if (!optimize)
        !          4681:        break;
        !          4682: 
        !          4683:       if (arglist == 0
        !          4684:          /* Arg could be non-integer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
        !          4685:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != REAL_TYPE)
        !          4686:        return const0_rtx;
        !          4687: 
        !          4688:       /* Compute the argument.  */
        !          4689:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (arglist), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
        !          4690:       /* Compute sqrt, into TARGET if possible.
        !          4691:         Set TARGET to wherever the result comes back.  */
        !          4692:       target = expand_unop (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))),
        !          4693:                            sqrt_optab, op0, target, 1);
        !          4694:       if (target == 0)
        !          4695:        break;
        !          4696:       return target;
        !          4697: 
        !          4698: 
1.1       root     4699:     case BUILT_IN_SAVEREGS:
                   4700:       /* Don't do __builtin_saveregs more than once in a function.
                   4701:         Save the result of the first call and reuse it.  */
                   4702:       if (saveregs_value != 0)
                   4703:        return saveregs_value;
                   4704:       {
                   4705:        /* When this function is called, it means that registers must be
                   4706:           saved on entry to this function.  So we migrate the
                   4707:           call to the first insn of this function.  */
                   4708:        rtx temp;
                   4709:        rtx seq;
                   4710:        rtx valreg, saved_valreg;
                   4711: 
                   4712:        /* Now really call the function.  `expand_call' does not call
                   4713:           expand_builtin, so there is no danger of infinite recursion here.  */
                   4714:        start_sequence ();
                   4715: 
                   4716: #ifdef EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
                   4717:        /* Do whatever the machine needs done in this case.  */
                   4718:        temp = EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS (arglist);
                   4719: #else
                   4720:        /* The register where the function returns its value
                   4721:           is likely to have something else in it, such as an argument.
                   4722:           So preserve that register around the call.  */
                   4723:        if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   4724:          {
                   4725:            valreg = hard_libcall_value (value_mode);
                   4726:            saved_valreg = gen_reg_rtx (value_mode);
                   4727:            emit_move_insn (saved_valreg, valreg);
                   4728:          }
                   4729: 
                   4730:        /* Generate the call, putting the value in a pseudo.  */
                   4731:        temp = expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
                   4732: 
                   4733:        if (value_mode != VOIDmode)
                   4734:          emit_move_insn (valreg, saved_valreg);
                   4735: #endif
                   4736: 
                   4737:        seq = get_insns ();
                   4738:        end_sequence ();
                   4739: 
                   4740:        saveregs_value = temp;
                   4741: 
                   4742:        /* This won't work inside a SEQUENCE--it really has to be
                   4743:           at the start of the function.  */
                   4744:        if (in_sequence_p ())
                   4745:          {
                   4746:            /* Better to do this than to crash.  */
                   4747:            error ("`va_start' used within `({...})'");
                   4748:            return temp;
                   4749:          }
                   4750: 
                   4751:        /* Put the sequence after the NOTE that starts the function.  */
                   4752:        emit_insns_before (seq, NEXT_INSN (get_insns ()));
                   4753:        return temp;
                   4754:       }
                   4755: 
                   4756:       /* __builtin_args_info (N) returns word N of the arg space info
                   4757:         for the current function.  The number and meanings of words
                   4758:         is controlled by the definition of CUMULATIVE_ARGS.  */
                   4759:     case BUILT_IN_ARGS_INFO:
                   4760:       {
                   4761:        int nwords = sizeof (CUMULATIVE_ARGS) / sizeof (int);
                   4762:        int i;
                   4763:        int *word_ptr = (int *) &current_function_args_info;
                   4764:        tree type, elts, result;
                   4765: 
                   4766:        if (sizeof (CUMULATIVE_ARGS) % sizeof (int) != 0)
                   4767:          fatal ("CUMULATIVE_ARGS type defined badly; see %s, line %d",
                   4768:                 __FILE__, __LINE__);
                   4769: 
                   4770:        if (arglist != 0)
                   4771:          {
                   4772:            tree arg = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   4773:            if (TREE_CODE (arg) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4774:              error ("argument of __builtin_args_info must be constant");
                   4775:            else
                   4776:              {
                   4777:                int wordnum = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (arg);
                   4778: 
                   4779:                if (wordnum < 0 || wordnum >= nwords)
                   4780:                  error ("argument of __builtin_args_info out of range");
                   4781:                else
                   4782:                  return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, word_ptr[wordnum]);
                   4783:              }
                   4784:          }
                   4785:        else
                   4786:          error ("missing argument in __builtin_args_info");
                   4787: 
                   4788:        return const0_rtx;
                   4789: 
                   4790: #if 0
                   4791:        for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   4792:          elts = tree_cons (NULL_TREE, build_int_2 (word_ptr[i], 0));
                   4793: 
                   4794:        type = build_array_type (integer_type_node,
                   4795:                                 build_index_type (build_int_2 (nwords, 0)));
                   4796:        result = build (CONSTRUCTOR, type, NULL_TREE, nreverse (elts));
                   4797:        TREE_CONSTANT (result) = 1;
                   4798:        TREE_STATIC (result) = 1;
                   4799:        result = build (INDIRECT_REF, build_pointer_type (type), result);
                   4800:        TREE_CONSTANT (result) = 1;
                   4801:        return expand_expr (result, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4802: #endif
                   4803:       }
                   4804: 
                   4805:       /* Return the address of the first anonymous stack arg.  */
                   4806:     case BUILT_IN_NEXT_ARG:
                   4807:       {
                   4808:        tree fntype = TREE_TYPE (current_function_decl);
                   4809:        if (!(TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype) != 0
                   4810:              && (TREE_VALUE (tree_last (TYPE_ARG_TYPES (fntype)))
                   4811:                  != void_type_node)))
                   4812:          {
                   4813:            error ("`va_start' used in function with fixed args");
                   4814:            return const0_rtx;
                   4815:          }
                   4816:       }
                   4817: 
                   4818:       return expand_binop (Pmode, add_optab,
                   4819:                           current_function_internal_arg_pointer,
                   4820:                           current_function_arg_offset_rtx,
                   4821:                           0, 0, OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   4822: 
                   4823:     case BUILT_IN_CLASSIFY_TYPE:
                   4824:       if (arglist != 0)
                   4825:        {
                   4826:          tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist));
                   4827:          enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (type);
                   4828:          if (code == VOID_TYPE)
                   4829:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, void_type_class);
                   4830:          if (code == INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4831:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, integer_type_class);
                   4832:          if (code == CHAR_TYPE)
                   4833:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, char_type_class);
                   4834:          if (code == ENUMERAL_TYPE)
                   4835:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, enumeral_type_class);
                   4836:          if (code == BOOLEAN_TYPE)
                   4837:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, boolean_type_class);
                   4838:          if (code == POINTER_TYPE)
                   4839:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, pointer_type_class);
                   4840:          if (code == REFERENCE_TYPE)
                   4841:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, reference_type_class);
                   4842:          if (code == OFFSET_TYPE)
                   4843:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, offset_type_class);
                   4844:          if (code == REAL_TYPE)
                   4845:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, real_type_class);
                   4846:          if (code == COMPLEX_TYPE)
                   4847:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, complex_type_class);
                   4848:          if (code == FUNCTION_TYPE)
                   4849:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, function_type_class);
                   4850:          if (code == METHOD_TYPE)
                   4851:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, method_type_class);
                   4852:          if (code == RECORD_TYPE)
                   4853:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, record_type_class);
                   4854:          if (code == UNION_TYPE)
                   4855:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, union_type_class);
                   4856:          if (code == ARRAY_TYPE)
                   4857:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, array_type_class);
                   4858:          if (code == STRING_TYPE)
                   4859:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, string_type_class);
                   4860:          if (code == SET_TYPE)
                   4861:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, set_type_class);
                   4862:          if (code == FILE_TYPE)
                   4863:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, file_type_class);
                   4864:          if (code == LANG_TYPE)
                   4865:            return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, lang_type_class);
                   4866:        }
                   4867:       return gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, no_type_class);
                   4868: 
                   4869:     case BUILT_IN_CONSTANT_P:
                   4870:       if (arglist == 0)
                   4871:        return const0_rtx;
                   4872:       else
                   4873:        return (TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_VALUE (arglist)) == 'c'
                   4874:                ? const1_rtx : const0_rtx);
                   4875: 
                   4876:     case BUILT_IN_FRAME_ADDRESS:
                   4877:       /* The argument must be a nonnegative integer constant.
                   4878:         It counts the number of frames to scan up the stack.
                   4879:         The value is the address of that frame.  */
                   4880:     case BUILT_IN_RETURN_ADDRESS:
                   4881:       /* The argument must be a nonnegative integer constant.
                   4882:         It counts the number of frames to scan up the stack.
                   4883:         The value is the return address saved in that frame.  */
                   4884:       if (arglist == 0)
                   4885:        /* Warning about missing arg was already issued.  */
                   4886:        return const0_rtx;
                   4887:       else if (TREE_CODE (TREE_VALUE (arglist)) != INTEGER_CST)
                   4888:        {
                   4889:          error ("invalid arg to __builtin_return_address");
                   4890:          return const0_rtx;
                   4891:        }
                   4892:       else if (tree_int_cst_lt (TREE_VALUE (arglist), integer_zero_node))
                   4893:        {
                   4894:          error ("invalid arg to __builtin_return_address");
                   4895:          return const0_rtx;
                   4896:        }
                   4897:       else
                   4898:        {
                   4899:          int count = TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_VALUE (arglist)); 
                   4900:          rtx tem = frame_pointer_rtx;
                   4901:          int i;
                   4902: 
                   4903:          /* Scan back COUNT frames to the specified frame.  */
                   4904:          for (i = 0; i < count; i++)
                   4905:            {
                   4906:              /* Assume the dynamic chain pointer is in the word that
                   4907:                 the frame address points to, unless otherwise specified.  */
                   4908: #ifdef DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
                   4909:              tem = DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (tem);
                   4910: #endif
                   4911:              tem = memory_address (Pmode, tem);
                   4912:              tem = copy_to_reg (gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, tem));
                   4913:            }
                   4914: 
                   4915:          /* For __builtin_frame_address, return what we've got.  */
                   4916:          if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_FRAME_ADDRESS)
                   4917:            return tem;
                   4918: 
                   4919:          /* For __builtin_return_address,
                   4920:             Get the return address from that frame.  */
                   4921: #ifdef RETURN_ADDR_RTX
                   4922:          return RETURN_ADDR_RTX (count, tem);
                   4923: #else
                   4924:          tem = memory_address (Pmode,
                   4925:                                plus_constant (tem, GET_MODE_SIZE (Pmode)));
                   4926:          return copy_to_reg (gen_rtx (MEM, Pmode, tem));
                   4927: #endif
                   4928:        }
                   4929: 
                   4930:     case BUILT_IN_ALLOCA:
                   4931:       if (arglist == 0
                   4932:          /* Arg could be non-integer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4933:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4934:        return const0_rtx;
                   4935:       current_function_calls_alloca = 1;
                   4936:       /* Compute the argument.  */
                   4937:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (arglist), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4938: 
                   4939:       /* Allocate the desired space.  */
                   4940:       target = allocate_dynamic_stack_space (op0, target);
                   4941: 
                   4942:       /* Record the new stack level for nonlocal gotos.  */
                   4943:       if (nonlocal_goto_stack_level != 0)
                   4944:        emit_move_insn (nonlocal_goto_stack_level, stack_pointer_rtx);
                   4945:       return target;
                   4946: 
                   4947:     case BUILT_IN_FFS:
                   4948:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4949:       if (!optimize)
                   4950:        break;
                   4951: 
                   4952:       if (arglist == 0
                   4953:          /* Arg could be non-integer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4954:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   4955:        return const0_rtx;
                   4956: 
                   4957:       /* Compute the argument.  */
                   4958:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (arglist), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   4959:       /* Compute ffs, into TARGET if possible.
                   4960:         Set TARGET to wherever the result comes back.  */
                   4961:       target = expand_unop (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))),
                   4962:                            ffs_optab, op0, target, 1);
                   4963:       if (target == 0)
                   4964:        abort ();
                   4965:       return target;
                   4966: 
                   4967:     case BUILT_IN_STRLEN:
                   4968:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4969:       if (!optimize)
                   4970:        break;
                   4971: 
                   4972:       if (arglist == 0
                   4973:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4974:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4975:        return const0_rtx;
                   4976:       else
                   4977:        {
                   4978:          tree len = c_strlen (TREE_VALUE (arglist));
                   4979: 
                   4980:          if (len == 0)
                   4981:            break;
                   4982:          return expand_expr (len, target, mode, 0);
                   4983:        }
                   4984: 
                   4985:     case BUILT_IN_STRCPY:
                   4986:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   4987:       if (!optimize)
                   4988:        break;
                   4989: 
                   4990:       if (arglist == 0
                   4991:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   4992:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   4993:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   4994:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   4995:        return const0_rtx;
                   4996:       else
                   4997:        {
                   4998:          tree len = c_strlen (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   4999: 
                   5000:          if (len == 0)
                   5001:            break;
                   5002: 
                   5003:          len = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, len, integer_one_node);
                   5004: 
                   5005:          chainon (arglist, build_tree_list (0, len));
                   5006:        }
                   5007: 
                   5008:       /* Drops in.  */
                   5009:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCPY:
                   5010:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   5011:       if (!optimize)
                   5012:        break;
                   5013: 
                   5014:       if (arglist == 0
                   5015:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   5016:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5017:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   5018:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5019:          || TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) == 0
                   5020:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist))))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   5021:        return const0_rtx;
                   5022:       else
                   5023:        {
                   5024:          tree dest = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   5025:          tree src = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   5026:          tree len = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   5027: 
                   5028:          int src_align
                   5029:            = get_pointer_alignment (src, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5030:          int dest_align
                   5031:            = get_pointer_alignment (dest, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5032:          rtx dest_rtx;
                   5033: 
                   5034:          /* If either SRC or DEST is not a pointer type, don't do
                   5035:             this operation in-line.  */
                   5036:          if (src_align == 0 || dest_align == 0)
                   5037:            {
                   5038:              if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_STRCPY)
                   5039:                TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) = 0;
                   5040:              break;
                   5041:            }
                   5042: 
                   5043:          dest_rtx = expand_expr (dest, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL);
                   5044: 
                   5045:          /* Copy word part most expediently.  */
                   5046:          emit_block_move (gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5047:                                    memory_address (BLKmode, dest_rtx)),
                   5048:                           gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5049:                                    memory_address (BLKmode,
                   5050:                                                    expand_expr (src, 0, Pmode,
                   5051:                                                                 EXPAND_NORMAL))),
                   5052:                           expand_expr (len, 0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   5053:                           MIN (src_align, dest_align));
                   5054:          return dest_rtx;
                   5055:        }
                   5056: 
                   5057: /* These comparison functions need an instruction that returns an actual
                   5058:    index.  An ordinary compare that just sets the condition codes
                   5059:    is not enough.  */
                   5060: #ifdef HAVE_cmpstrsi
                   5061:     case BUILT_IN_STRCMP:
                   5062:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   5063:       if (!optimize)
                   5064:        break;
                   5065: 
                   5066:       if (arglist == 0
                   5067:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   5068:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5069:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   5070:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE)
                   5071:        return const0_rtx;
                   5072:       else if (!HAVE_cmpstrsi)
                   5073:        break;
                   5074:       {
                   5075:        tree arg1 = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   5076:        tree arg2 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   5077:        tree offset;
                   5078:        tree len, len2;
                   5079: 
                   5080:        len = c_strlen (arg1);
                   5081:        if (len)
                   5082:          len = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, integer_one_node, len);
                   5083:        len2 = c_strlen (arg2);
                   5084:        if (len2)
                   5085:          len2 = size_binop (PLUS_EXPR, integer_one_node, len2);
                   5086: 
                   5087:        /* If we don't have a constant length for the first, use the length
                   5088:           of the second, if we know it.  We don't require a constant for
                   5089:           this case; some cost analysis could be done if both are available
                   5090:           but neither is constant.  For now, assume they're equally cheap.
                   5091: 
                   5092:           If both strings have constant lengths, use the smaller.  This
                   5093:           could arise if optimization results in strcpy being called with
                   5094:           two fixed strings, or if the code was machine-generated.  We should
                   5095:           add some code to the `memcmp' handler below to deal with such
                   5096:           situations, someday.  */
                   5097:        if (!len || TREE_CODE (len) != INTEGER_CST)
                   5098:          {
                   5099:            if (len2)
                   5100:              len = len2;
                   5101:            else if (len == 0)
                   5102:              break;
                   5103:          }
                   5104:        else if (len2 && TREE_CODE (len2) == INTEGER_CST)
                   5105:          {
                   5106:            if (tree_int_cst_lt (len2, len))
                   5107:              len = len2;
                   5108:          }
                   5109: 
                   5110:        chainon (arglist, build_tree_list (0, len));
                   5111:       }
                   5112: 
                   5113:       /* Drops in.  */
                   5114:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCMP:
                   5115:       /* If not optimizing, call the library function.  */
                   5116:       if (!optimize)
                   5117:        break;
                   5118: 
                   5119:       if (arglist == 0
                   5120:          /* Arg could be non-pointer if user redeclared this fcn wrong.  */
                   5121:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (arglist))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5122:          || TREE_CHAIN (arglist) == 0
                   5123:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)))) != POINTER_TYPE
                   5124:          || TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) == 0
                   5125:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist))))) != INTEGER_TYPE)
                   5126:        return const0_rtx;
                   5127:       else if (!HAVE_cmpstrsi)
                   5128:        break;
                   5129:       {
                   5130:        tree arg1 = TREE_VALUE (arglist);
                   5131:        tree arg2 = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (arglist));
                   5132:        tree len = TREE_VALUE (TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)));
                   5133:        rtx result;
                   5134: 
                   5135:        int arg1_align
                   5136:          = get_pointer_alignment (arg1, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5137:        int arg2_align
                   5138:          = get_pointer_alignment (arg2, BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT) / BITS_PER_UNIT;
                   5139:        enum machine_mode insn_mode
                   5140:          = insn_operand_mode[(int) CODE_FOR_cmpstrsi][0];
                   5141: 
                   5142:        /* If we don't have POINTER_TYPE, call the function.  */
                   5143:        if (arg1_align == 0 || arg2_align == 0)
                   5144:          {
                   5145:            if (DECL_FUNCTION_CODE (fndecl) == BUILT_IN_STRCMP)
                   5146:              TREE_CHAIN (TREE_CHAIN (arglist)) = 0;
                   5147:            break;
                   5148:          }
                   5149: 
                   5150:        /* Make a place to write the result of the instruction.  */
                   5151:        result = target;
                   5152:        if (! (result != 0
                   5153:               && GET_CODE (result) == REG && GET_MODE (result) == insn_mode
                   5154:               && REGNO (result) >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER))
                   5155:          result = gen_reg_rtx (insn_mode);
                   5156: 
                   5157:        emit_insn (gen_cmpstrsi (result,
                   5158:                                 gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5159:                                          expand_expr (arg1, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL)),
                   5160:                                 gen_rtx (MEM, BLKmode,
                   5161:                                          expand_expr (arg2, 0, Pmode, EXPAND_NORMAL)),
                   5162:                                 expand_expr (len, 0, VOIDmode, 0),
                   5163:                                 gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   5164:                                          MIN (arg1_align, arg2_align))));
                   5165: 
                   5166:        /* Return the value in the proper mode for this function.  */
                   5167:        mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   5168:        if (GET_MODE (result) == mode)
                   5169:          return result;
                   5170:        else if (target != 0)
                   5171:          {
                   5172:            convert_move (target, result, 0);
                   5173:            return target;
                   5174:          }
                   5175:        else
                   5176:          return convert_to_mode (mode, result, 0);
                   5177:       }        
                   5178: #else
                   5179:     case BUILT_IN_STRCMP:
                   5180:     case BUILT_IN_MEMCMP:
                   5181:       break;
                   5182: #endif
                   5183: 
                   5184:     default:                   /* just do library call, if unknown builtin */
                   5185:       error ("built-in function %s not currently supported",
                   5186:             IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (fndecl)));
                   5187:     }
                   5188: 
                   5189:   /* The switch statement above can drop through to cause the function
                   5190:      to be called normally.  */
                   5191: 
                   5192:   return expand_call (exp, target, ignore);
                   5193: }
                   5194: 
                   5195: /* Expand code for a post- or pre- increment or decrement
                   5196:    and return the RTX for the result.
                   5197:    POST is 1 for postinc/decrements and 0 for preinc/decrements.  */
                   5198: 
                   5199: static rtx
                   5200: expand_increment (exp, post)
                   5201:      register tree exp;
                   5202:      int post;
                   5203: {
                   5204:   register rtx op0, op1;
                   5205:   register rtx temp, value;
                   5206:   register tree incremented = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   5207:   optab this_optab = add_optab;
                   5208:   int icode;
                   5209:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (exp));
                   5210:   int op0_is_copy = 0;
                   5211: 
                   5212:   /* Stabilize any component ref that might need to be
                   5213:      evaluated more than once below.  */
                   5214:   if (TREE_CODE (incremented) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   5215:       || (TREE_CODE (incremented) == COMPONENT_REF
                   5216:          && (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 0)) != INDIRECT_REF
                   5217:              || DECL_BIT_FIELD (TREE_OPERAND (incremented, 1)))))
                   5218:     incremented = stabilize_reference (incremented);
                   5219: 
                   5220:   /* Compute the operands as RTX.
                   5221:      Note whether OP0 is the actual lvalue or a copy of it:
                   5222:      I believe it is a copy iff it is a register and insns were
1.1.1.2 ! root     5223:      generated in computing it or if it is a SUBREG (generated when
        !          5224:      the low-order field in a register was referenced).  */
1.1       root     5225:   temp = get_last_insn ();
                   5226:   op0 = expand_expr (incremented, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
1.1.1.2 ! root     5227:   op0_is_copy = (GET_CODE (op0) == SUBREG
        !          5228:                 || (GET_CODE (op0) == REG && temp != get_last_insn ()));
1.1       root     5229:   op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5230: 
                   5231:   /* Decide whether incrementing or decrementing.  */
                   5232:   if (TREE_CODE (exp) == POSTDECREMENT_EXPR
                   5233:       || TREE_CODE (exp) == PREDECREMENT_EXPR)
                   5234:     this_optab = sub_optab;
                   5235: 
                   5236:   /* If OP0 is not the actual lvalue, but rather a copy in a register,
                   5237:      then we cannot just increment OP0.  We must
                   5238:      therefore contrive to increment the original value.
                   5239:      Then we can return OP0 since it is a copy of the old value.  */
                   5240:   if (op0_is_copy)
                   5241:     {
                   5242:       /* This is the easiest way to increment the value wherever it is.
                   5243:         Problems with multiple evaluation of INCREMENTED
                   5244:         are prevented because either (1) it is a component_ref,
                   5245:         in which case it was stabilized above, or (2) it is an array_ref
                   5246:         with constant index in an array in a register, which is
                   5247:         safe to reevaluate.  */
                   5248:       tree newexp = build ((this_optab == add_optab
                   5249:                            ? PLUS_EXPR : MINUS_EXPR),
                   5250:                           TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5251:                           incremented,
                   5252:                           TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1));
                   5253:       temp = expand_assignment (incremented, newexp, ! post, 0);
                   5254:       return post ? op0 : temp;
                   5255:     }
                   5256: 
                   5257:   /* Convert decrement by a constant into a negative increment.  */
                   5258:   if (this_optab == sub_optab
                   5259:       && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   5260:     {
                   5261:       op1 = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, - INTVAL (op1));
                   5262:       this_optab = add_optab;
                   5263:     }
                   5264: 
                   5265:   if (post)
                   5266:     {
                   5267:       /* We have a true reference to the value in OP0.
                   5268:         If there is an insn to add or subtract in this mode, queue it.  */
                   5269: 
                   5270: #if 0  /* Turned off to avoid making extra insn for indexed memref.  */
                   5271:       op0 = stabilize (op0);
                   5272: #endif
                   5273: 
                   5274:       icode = (int) this_optab->handlers[(int) mode].insn_code;
                   5275:       if (icode != (int) CODE_FOR_nothing
                   5276:          /* Make sure that OP0 is valid for operands 0 and 1
                   5277:             of the insn we want to queue.  */
                   5278:          && (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][0]) (op0, mode)
                   5279:          && (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][1]) (op0, mode))
                   5280:        {
                   5281:          if (! (*insn_operand_predicate[icode][2]) (op1, mode))
                   5282:            op1 = force_reg (mode, op1);
                   5283: 
                   5284:          return enqueue_insn (op0, GEN_FCN (icode) (op0, op0, op1));
                   5285:        }
                   5286:     }
                   5287: 
                   5288:   /* Preincrement, or we can't increment with one simple insn.  */
                   5289:   if (post)
                   5290:     /* Save a copy of the value before inc or dec, to return it later.  */
                   5291:     temp = value = copy_to_reg (op0);
                   5292:   else
                   5293:     /* Arrange to return the incremented value.  */
                   5294:     /* Copy the rtx because expand_binop will protect from the queue,
                   5295:        and the results of that would be invalid for us to return
                   5296:        if our caller does emit_queue before using our result.  */
                   5297:     temp = copy_rtx (value = op0);
                   5298: 
                   5299:   /* Increment however we can.  */
                   5300:   op1 = expand_binop (mode, this_optab, value, op1, op0,
                   5301:                      TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (exp)), OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   5302:   /* Make sure the value is stored into OP0.  */
                   5303:   if (op1 != op0)
                   5304:     emit_move_insn (op0, op1);
                   5305: 
                   5306:   return temp;
                   5307: }
                   5308: 
                   5309: /* Expand all function calls contained within EXP, innermost ones first.
                   5310:    But don't look within expressions that have sequence points.
                   5311:    For each CALL_EXPR, record the rtx for its value
                   5312:    in the CALL_EXPR_RTL field.  */
                   5313: 
                   5314: static void
                   5315: preexpand_calls (exp)
                   5316:      tree exp;
                   5317: {
                   5318:   register int nops, i;
                   5319:   int type = TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (exp));
                   5320: 
                   5321:   if (! do_preexpand_calls)
                   5322:     return;
                   5323: 
                   5324:   /* Only expressions and references can contain calls.  */
                   5325: 
                   5326:   if (type != 'e' && type != '<' && type != '1' && type != '2' && type != 'r')
                   5327:     return;
                   5328: 
                   5329:   switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   5330:     {
                   5331:     case CALL_EXPR:
                   5332:       /* Do nothing if already expanded.  */
                   5333:       if (CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   5334:        return;
                   5335: 
                   5336:       /* Do nothing to built-in functions.  */
                   5337:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) != ADDR_EXPR
                   5338:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)) != FUNCTION_DECL
                   5339:          || ! DECL_BUILT_IN (TREE_OPERAND (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0)))
                   5340:        CALL_EXPR_RTL (exp) = expand_call (exp, 0, 0, 0);
                   5341:       return;
                   5342: 
                   5343:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   5344:     case COND_EXPR:
                   5345:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   5346:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   5347:       /* If we find one of these, then we can be sure
                   5348:         the adjust will be done for it (since it makes jumps).
                   5349:         Do it now, so that if this is inside an argument
                   5350:         of a function, we don't get the stack adjustment
                   5351:         after some other args have already been pushed.  */
                   5352:       do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   5353:       return;
                   5354: 
                   5355:     case BLOCK:
                   5356:     case RTL_EXPR:
                   5357:     case WITH_CLEANUP_EXPR:
                   5358:       return;
                   5359: 
                   5360:     case SAVE_EXPR:
                   5361:       if (SAVE_EXPR_RTL (exp) != 0)
                   5362:        return;
                   5363:     }
                   5364: 
                   5365:   nops = tree_code_length[(int) TREE_CODE (exp)];
                   5366:   for (i = 0; i < nops; i++)
                   5367:     if (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i) != 0)
                   5368:       {
                   5369:        type = TREE_CODE_CLASS (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i)));
                   5370:        if (type == 'e' || type == '<' || type == '1' || type == '2'
                   5371:            || type == 'r')
                   5372:          preexpand_calls (TREE_OPERAND (exp, i));
                   5373:       }
                   5374: }
                   5375: 
                   5376: /* At the start of a function, record that we have no previously-pushed
                   5377:    arguments waiting to be popped.  */
                   5378: 
                   5379: void
                   5380: init_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5381: {
                   5382:   pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5383: }
                   5384: 
                   5385: /* When exiting from function, if safe, clear out any pending stack adjust
                   5386:    so the adjustment won't get done.  */
                   5387: 
                   5388: void
                   5389: clear_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5390: {
                   5391: #ifdef EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
1.1.1.2 ! root     5392:   if (! flag_omit_frame_pointer && EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
        !          5393:       && ! (TREE_INLINE (current_function_decl) && ! flag_no_inline)
1.1       root     5394:       && ! flag_inline_functions)
                   5395:     pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5396: #endif
                   5397: }
                   5398: 
                   5399: /* Pop any previously-pushed arguments that have not been popped yet.  */
                   5400: 
                   5401: void
                   5402: do_pending_stack_adjust ()
                   5403: {
                   5404:   if (inhibit_defer_pop == 0)
                   5405:     {
                   5406:       if (pending_stack_adjust != 0)
                   5407:        adjust_stack (gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, pending_stack_adjust));
                   5408:       pending_stack_adjust = 0;
                   5409:     }
                   5410: }
                   5411: 
                   5412: /* Expand all cleanups up to OLD_CLEANUPS.
                   5413:    Needed here, and also for language-dependent calls.  */
                   5414: 
                   5415: void
                   5416: expand_cleanups_to (old_cleanups)
                   5417:      tree old_cleanups;
                   5418: {
                   5419:   while (cleanups_this_call != old_cleanups)
                   5420:     {
                   5421:       expand_expr (TREE_VALUE (cleanups_this_call), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5422:       cleanups_this_call = TREE_CHAIN (cleanups_this_call);
                   5423:     }
                   5424: }
                   5425: 
                   5426: /* Expand conditional expressions.  */
                   5427: 
                   5428: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is zero.
                   5429:    LABEL is an rtx of code CODE_LABEL, in this function and all the
                   5430:    functions here.  */
                   5431: 
                   5432: void
                   5433: jumpifnot (exp, label)
                   5434:      tree exp;
                   5435:      rtx label;
                   5436: {
                   5437:   do_jump (exp, label, 0);
                   5438: }
                   5439: 
                   5440: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to LABEL if the value is nonzero.  */
                   5441: 
                   5442: void
                   5443: jumpif (exp, label)
                   5444:      tree exp;
                   5445:      rtx label;
                   5446: {
                   5447:   do_jump (exp, 0, label);
                   5448: }
                   5449: 
                   5450: /* Generate code to evaluate EXP and jump to IF_FALSE_LABEL if
                   5451:    the result is zero, or IF_TRUE_LABEL if the result is one.
                   5452:    Either of IF_FALSE_LABEL and IF_TRUE_LABEL may be zero,
                   5453:    meaning fall through in that case.
                   5454: 
                   5455:    This function is responsible for optimizing cases such as
                   5456:    &&, || and comparison operators in EXP.  */
                   5457: 
                   5458: void
                   5459: do_jump (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5460:      tree exp;
                   5461:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5462: {
                   5463:   register enum tree_code code = TREE_CODE (exp);
                   5464:   /* Some cases need to create a label to jump to
                   5465:      in order to properly fall through.
                   5466:      These cases set DROP_THROUGH_LABEL nonzero.  */
                   5467:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5468:   rtx temp;
                   5469:   rtx comparison = 0;
                   5470:   int i;
                   5471:   tree type;
                   5472: 
                   5473:   emit_queue ();
                   5474: 
                   5475:   switch (code)
                   5476:     {
                   5477:     case ERROR_MARK:
                   5478:       break;
                   5479: 
                   5480:     case INTEGER_CST:
                   5481:       temp = integer_zerop (exp) ? if_false_label : if_true_label;
                   5482:       if (temp)
                   5483:        emit_jump (temp);
                   5484:       break;
                   5485: 
                   5486: #if 0
                   5487:       /* This is not true with #pragma weak  */
                   5488:     case ADDR_EXPR:
                   5489:       /* The address of something can never be zero.  */
                   5490:       if (if_true_label)
                   5491:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5492:       break;
                   5493: #endif
                   5494: 
                   5495:     case NOP_EXPR:
                   5496:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == COMPONENT_REF
                   5497:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == BIT_FIELD_REF
                   5498:          || TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) == ARRAY_REF)
                   5499:        goto normal;
                   5500:     case CONVERT_EXPR:
                   5501:       /* If we are narrowing the operand, we have to do the compare in the
                   5502:         narrower mode.  */
                   5503:       if ((TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp))
                   5504:           < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5505:        goto normal;
                   5506:     case NON_LVALUE_EXPR:
                   5507:     case REFERENCE_EXPR:
                   5508:     case ABS_EXPR:
                   5509:     case NEGATE_EXPR:
                   5510:     case LROTATE_EXPR:
                   5511:     case RROTATE_EXPR:
                   5512:       /* These cannot change zero->non-zero or vice versa.  */
                   5513:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5514:       break;
                   5515: 
                   5516: #if 0
                   5517:       /* This is never less insns than evaluating the PLUS_EXPR followed by
                   5518:         a test and can be longer if the test is eliminated.  */
                   5519:     case PLUS_EXPR:
                   5520:       /* Reduce to minus.  */
                   5521:       exp = build (MINUS_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5522:                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   5523:                   fold (build1 (NEGATE_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
                   5524:                                 TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))));
                   5525:       /* Process as MINUS.  */
                   5526: #endif
                   5527: 
                   5528:     case MINUS_EXPR:
                   5529:       /* Non-zero iff operands of minus differ.  */
                   5530:       comparison = compare (build (NE_EXPR, TREE_TYPE (exp),
                   5531:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0),
                   5532:                                   TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)),
                   5533:                            NE, NE);
                   5534:       break;
                   5535: 
                   5536:     case BIT_AND_EXPR:
                   5537:       /* If we are AND'ing with a small constant, do this comparison in the
                   5538:         smallest type that fits.  If the machine doesn't have comparisons
                   5539:         that small, it will be converted back to the wider comparison.
                   5540:         This helps if we are testing the sign bit of a narrower object.
                   5541:         combine can't do this for us because it can't know whether a
                   5542:         ZERO_EXTRACT or a compare in a smaller mode exists, but we do.  */
                   5543: 
                   5544:       if (TREE_CODE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)) == INTEGER_CST
                   5545:          && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT
                   5546:          && (i = floor_log2 (TREE_INT_CST_LOW (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))) >= 0
                   5547:          && (type = type_for_size (i + 1, 1)) != 0
                   5548:          && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
                   5549:        {
                   5550:          do_jump (convert (type, exp), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5551:          break;
                   5552:        }
                   5553:       goto normal;
                   5554: 
                   5555:     case TRUTH_NOT_EXPR:
                   5556:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5557:       break;
                   5558: 
                   5559:     case TRUTH_ANDIF_EXPR:
                   5560:       if (if_false_label == 0)
                   5561:        if_false_label = drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5562:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, 0);
                   5563:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5564:       break;
                   5565: 
                   5566:     case TRUTH_ORIF_EXPR:
                   5567:       if (if_true_label == 0)
                   5568:        if_true_label = drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5569:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, if_true_label);
                   5570:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5571:       break;
                   5572: 
                   5573:     case COMPOUND_EXPR:
                   5574:       expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), const0_rtx, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5575:       free_temp_slots ();
                   5576:       emit_queue ();
                   5577:       do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5578:       break;
                   5579: 
                   5580:     case COMPONENT_REF:
                   5581:     case BIT_FIELD_REF:
                   5582:     case ARRAY_REF:
                   5583:       {
                   5584:        int bitsize, bitpos, unsignedp;
                   5585:        enum machine_mode mode;
                   5586:        tree type;
                   5587:        int volatilep = 0;
                   5588: 
                   5589:        /* Get description of this reference.  We don't actually care
                   5590:           about the underlying object here.  */
                   5591:        get_inner_reference (exp, &bitsize, &bitpos, &mode, &unsignedp,
                   5592:                             &volatilep);
                   5593: 
                   5594:        type = type_for_size (bitsize, unsignedp);
                   5595:        if (type != 0
                   5596:            && TYPE_PRECISION (type) < TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (exp)))
                   5597:          {
                   5598:            do_jump (convert (type, exp), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5599:            break;
                   5600:          }
                   5601:        goto normal;
                   5602:       }
                   5603: 
                   5604:     case COND_EXPR:
                   5605:       /* Do (a ? 1 : 0) and (a ? 0 : 1) as special cases.  */
                   5606:       if (integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   5607:          && integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   5608:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5609: 
                   5610:       else if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1))
                   5611:               && integer_onep (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2)))
                   5612:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5613: 
                   5614:       else
                   5615:        {
                   5616:          register rtx label1 = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5617:          drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5618:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), label1, 0);
                   5619:          /* Now the THEN-expression.  */
                   5620:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1),
                   5621:                   if_false_label ? if_false_label : drop_through_label,
                   5622:                   if_true_label ? if_true_label : drop_through_label);
                   5623:          emit_label (label1);
                   5624:          /* Now the ELSE-expression.  */
                   5625:          do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 2),
                   5626:                   if_false_label ? if_false_label : drop_through_label,
                   5627:                   if_true_label ? if_true_label : drop_through_label);
                   5628:        }
                   5629:       break;
                   5630: 
                   5631:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   5632:       if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   5633:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5634:       else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5635:                == MODE_INT)
                   5636:               && 
                   5637:               !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5638:        do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5639:       else
                   5640:        comparison = compare (exp, EQ, EQ);
                   5641:       break;
                   5642: 
                   5643:     case NE_EXPR:
                   5644:       if (integer_zerop (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1)))
                   5645:        do_jump (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5646:       else if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5647:                == MODE_INT)
                   5648:               && 
                   5649:               !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5650:        do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5651:       else
                   5652:        comparison = compare (exp, NE, NE);
                   5653:       break;
                   5654: 
                   5655:     case LT_EXPR:
                   5656:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5657:           == MODE_INT)
                   5658:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5659:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 1, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5660:       else
                   5661:        comparison = compare (exp, LT, LTU);
                   5662:       break;
                   5663: 
                   5664:     case LE_EXPR:
                   5665:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5666:           == MODE_INT)
                   5667:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5668:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 0, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5669:       else
                   5670:        comparison = compare (exp, LE, LEU);
                   5671:       break;
                   5672: 
                   5673:     case GT_EXPR:
                   5674:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5675:           == MODE_INT)
                   5676:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5677:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 0, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5678:       else
                   5679:        comparison = compare (exp, GT, GTU);
                   5680:       break;
                   5681: 
                   5682:     case GE_EXPR:
                   5683:       if ((GET_MODE_CLASS (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0))))
                   5684:           == MODE_INT)
                   5685:          && !can_compare_p (TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)))))
                   5686:        do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, 1, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5687:       else
                   5688:        comparison = compare (exp, GE, GEU);
                   5689:       break;
                   5690: 
                   5691:     default:
                   5692:     normal:
                   5693:       temp = expand_expr (exp, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5694: #if 0
                   5695:       /* This is not needed any more and causes poor code since it causes
                   5696:         comparisons and tests from non-SI objects to have different code
                   5697:         sequences.  */
                   5698:       /* Copy to register to avoid generating bad insns by cse
                   5699:         from (set (mem ...) (arithop))  (set (cc0) (mem ...)).  */
                   5700:       if (!cse_not_expected && GET_CODE (temp) == MEM)
                   5701:        temp = copy_to_reg (temp);
                   5702: #endif
                   5703:       do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   5704:       if (GET_CODE (temp) == CONST_INT)
                   5705:        comparison = (temp == const0_rtx ? const0_rtx : const_true_rtx);
                   5706:       else if (GET_CODE (temp) == LABEL_REF)
                   5707:        comparison = const_true_rtx;
                   5708:       else if (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (temp)) == MODE_INT
                   5709:               && !can_compare_p (GET_MODE (temp)))
                   5710:        /* Note swapping the labels gives us not-equal.  */
                   5711:        do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (temp, if_true_label, if_false_label);
                   5712:       else if (GET_MODE (temp) != VOIDmode)
                   5713:        comparison = compare_from_rtx (temp, CONST0_RTX (GET_MODE (temp)),
                   5714:                                       NE, 1, GET_MODE (temp), 0, 0);
                   5715:       else
                   5716:        abort ();
                   5717:     }
                   5718: 
                   5719:   /* Do any postincrements in the expression that was tested.  */
                   5720:   emit_queue ();
                   5721: 
                   5722:   /* If COMPARISON is nonzero here, it is an rtx that can be substituted
                   5723:      straight into a conditional jump instruction as the jump condition.
                   5724:      Otherwise, all the work has been done already.  */
                   5725: 
                   5726:   if (comparison == const_true_rtx)
                   5727:     {
                   5728:       if (if_true_label)
                   5729:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5730:     }
                   5731:   else if (comparison == const0_rtx)
                   5732:     {
                   5733:       if (if_false_label)
                   5734:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5735:     }
                   5736:   else if (comparison)
                   5737:     do_jump_for_compare (comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label);
                   5738: 
                   5739:   free_temp_slots ();
                   5740: 
                   5741:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5742:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5743: }
                   5744: 
                   5745: /* Given a comparison expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
                   5746:    with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label.
                   5747:    The code of EXP is ignored; we always test GT if SWAP is 0,
                   5748:    and LT if SWAP is 1.  */
                   5749: 
                   5750: static void
                   5751: do_jump_by_parts_greater (exp, swap, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5752:      tree exp;
                   5753:      int swap;
                   5754:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5755: {
                   5756:   rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, swap), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5757:   rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, !swap), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5758:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5759:   int nwords = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
                   5760:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5761:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5762:   int i;
                   5763: 
                   5764:   if (! if_true_label || ! if_false_label)
                   5765:     drop_through_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5766:   if (! if_true_label)
                   5767:     if_true_label = drop_through_label;
                   5768:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5769:     if_false_label = drop_through_label;
                   5770: 
                   5771:   /* Compare a word at a time, high order first.  */
                   5772:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5773:     {
                   5774:       rtx comp;
                   5775:       rtx op0_word, op1_word;
                   5776: 
                   5777:       if (WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN)
                   5778:        {
                   5779:          op0_word = operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode);
                   5780:          op1_word = operand_subword_force (op1, i, mode);
                   5781:        }
                   5782:       else
                   5783:        {
                   5784:          op0_word = operand_subword_force (op0, nwords - 1 - i, mode);
                   5785:          op1_word = operand_subword_force (op1, nwords - 1 - i, mode);
                   5786:        }
                   5787: 
                   5788:       /* All but high-order word must be compared as unsigned.  */
                   5789:       comp = compare_from_rtx (op0_word, op1_word,
                   5790:                               (unsignedp || i > 0) ? GTU : GT,
                   5791:                               unsignedp, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5792:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5793:        emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5794:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5795:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, 0, if_true_label);
                   5796: 
                   5797:       /* Consider lower words only if these are equal.  */
                   5798:       comp = compare_from_rtx (op0_word, op1_word, NE, unsignedp, word_mode,
                   5799:                               0, 0);
                   5800:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5801:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5802:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5803:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, 0, if_false_label);
                   5804:     }
                   5805: 
                   5806:   if (if_false_label)
                   5807:     emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5808:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5809:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5810: }
                   5811: 
                   5812: /* Given an EQ_EXPR expression EXP for values too wide to be compared
                   5813:    with one insn, test the comparison and jump to the appropriate label.  */
                   5814: 
                   5815: static void
                   5816: do_jump_by_parts_equality (exp, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5817:      tree exp;
                   5818:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5819: {
                   5820:   rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5821:   rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5822:   enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)));
                   5823:   int nwords = (GET_MODE_SIZE (mode) / UNITS_PER_WORD);
                   5824:   int i;
                   5825:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5826: 
                   5827:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5828:     drop_through_label = if_false_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5829: 
                   5830:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5831:     {
                   5832:       rtx comp = compare_from_rtx (operand_subword_force (op0, i, mode),
                   5833:                                   operand_subword_force (op1, i, mode),
                   5834:                                   EQ, 0, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5835:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5836:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5837:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5838:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, if_false_label, 0);
                   5839:     }
                   5840: 
                   5841:   if (if_true_label)
                   5842:     emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5843:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5844:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5845: }
                   5846: 
                   5847: /* Jump according to whether OP0 is 0.
                   5848:    We assume that OP0 has an integer mode that is too wide
                   5849:    for the available compare insns.  */
                   5850: 
                   5851: static void
                   5852: do_jump_by_parts_equality_rtx (op0, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5853:      rtx op0;
                   5854:      rtx if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5855: {
                   5856:   int nwords = GET_MODE_SIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) / UNITS_PER_WORD;
                   5857:   int i;
                   5858:   rtx drop_through_label = 0;
                   5859: 
                   5860:   if (! if_false_label)
                   5861:     drop_through_label = if_false_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5862: 
                   5863:   for (i = 0; i < nwords; i++)
                   5864:     {
                   5865:       rtx comp = compare_from_rtx (operand_subword_force (op0, i,
                   5866:                                                          GET_MODE (op0)),
                   5867:                                   const0_rtx, EQ, 0, word_mode, 0, 0);
                   5868:       if (comp == const_true_rtx)
                   5869:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5870:       else if (comp != const0_rtx)
                   5871:        do_jump_for_compare (comp, if_false_label, 0);
                   5872:     }
                   5873: 
                   5874:   if (if_true_label)
                   5875:     emit_jump (if_true_label);
                   5876:   if (drop_through_label)
                   5877:     emit_label (drop_through_label);
                   5878: }
                   5879: 
                   5880: /* Given a comparison expression in rtl form, output conditional branches to
                   5881:    IF_TRUE_LABEL, IF_FALSE_LABEL, or both.  */
                   5882: 
                   5883: static void
                   5884: do_jump_for_compare (comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label)
                   5885:      rtx comparison, if_false_label, if_true_label;
                   5886: {
                   5887:   if (if_true_label)
                   5888:     {
                   5889:       if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)] != 0)
                   5890:        emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)]) (if_true_label));
                   5891:       else
                   5892:        abort ();
                   5893: 
                   5894:       if (if_false_label)
                   5895:        emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5896:     }
                   5897:   else if (if_false_label)
                   5898:     {
                   5899:       rtx insn;
                   5900:       rtx prev = PREV_INSN (get_last_insn ());
                   5901:       rtx branch = 0;
                   5902: 
                   5903:       /* Output the branch with the opposite condition.  Then try to invert
                   5904:         what is generated.  If more than one insn is a branch, or if the
                   5905:         branch is not the last insn written, abort. If we can't invert
                   5906:         the branch, emit make a true label, redirect this jump to that,
                   5907:         emit a jump to the false label and define the true label.  */
                   5908: 
                   5909:       if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)] != 0)
                   5910:        emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) GET_CODE (comparison)]) (if_false_label));
                   5911:       else
                   5912:        abort ();
                   5913: 
                   5914:       /* Here we get the insn before what was just emitted.
                   5915:         On some machines, emitting the branch can discard
                   5916:         the previous compare insn and emit a replacement.  */
                   5917:       if (prev == 0)
                   5918:        /* If there's only one preceding insn...  */
                   5919:        insn = get_insns ();
                   5920:       else
                   5921:        insn = NEXT_INSN (prev);
                   5922: 
                   5923:       for (insn = NEXT_INSN (insn); insn; insn = NEXT_INSN (insn))
                   5924:        if (GET_CODE (insn) == JUMP_INSN)
                   5925:          {
                   5926:            if (branch)
                   5927:              abort ();
                   5928:            branch = insn;
                   5929:          }
                   5930: 
                   5931:       if (branch != get_last_insn ())
                   5932:        abort ();
                   5933: 
                   5934:       if (! invert_jump (branch, if_false_label))
                   5935:        {
                   5936:          if_true_label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   5937:          redirect_jump (branch, if_true_label);
                   5938:          emit_jump (if_false_label);
                   5939:          emit_label (if_true_label);
                   5940:        }
                   5941:     }
                   5942: }
                   5943: 
                   5944: /* Generate code for a comparison expression EXP
                   5945:    (including code to compute the values to be compared)
                   5946:    and set (CC0) according to the result.
                   5947:    SIGNED_CODE should be the rtx operation for this comparison for
                   5948:    signed data; UNSIGNED_CODE, likewise for use if data is unsigned.
                   5949: 
                   5950:    We force a stack adjustment unless there are currently
                   5951:    things pushed on the stack that aren't yet used.  */
                   5952: 
                   5953: static rtx
                   5954: compare (exp, signed_code, unsigned_code)
                   5955:      register tree exp;
                   5956:      enum rtx_code signed_code, unsigned_code;
                   5957: {
                   5958:   register rtx op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5959:   register rtx op1 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1), 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   5960:   register tree type = TREE_TYPE (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0));
                   5961:   register enum machine_mode mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   5962:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   5963:   enum rtx_code code = unsignedp ? unsigned_code : signed_code;
                   5964: 
                   5965:   return compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, mode,
                   5966:                           ((mode == BLKmode)
                   5967:                            ? expr_size (TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0)) : 0),
                   5968:                           TYPE_ALIGN (TREE_TYPE (exp)) / BITS_PER_UNIT);
                   5969: }
                   5970: 
                   5971: /* Like compare but expects the values to compare as two rtx's.
                   5972:    The decision as to signed or unsigned comparison must be made by the caller.
                   5973: 
                   5974:    If MODE is BLKmode, SIZE is an RTX giving the size of the objects being
                   5975:    compared.
                   5976: 
                   5977:    If ALIGN is non-zero, it is the alignment of this type; if zero, the
                   5978:    size of MODE should be used.  */
                   5979: 
                   5980: rtx
                   5981: compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, mode, size, align)
                   5982:      register rtx op0, op1;
                   5983:      enum rtx_code code;
                   5984:      int unsignedp;
                   5985:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   5986:      rtx size;
                   5987:      int align;
                   5988: {
                   5989:   /* If one operand is constant, make it the second one.  */
                   5990: 
                   5991:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT || GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_DOUBLE)
                   5992:     {
                   5993:       rtx tem = op0;
                   5994:       op0 = op1;
                   5995:       op1 = tem;
                   5996:       code = swap_condition (code);
                   5997:     }
                   5998: 
                   5999:   if (flag_force_mem)
                   6000:     {
                   6001:       op0 = force_not_mem (op0);
                   6002:       op1 = force_not_mem (op1);
                   6003:     }
                   6004: 
                   6005:   do_pending_stack_adjust ();
                   6006: 
                   6007:   if (GET_CODE (op0) == CONST_INT && GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT)
                   6008:     return simplify_relational_operation (code, mode, op0, op1);
                   6009: 
                   6010:   /* If this is a signed equality comparison, we can do it as an
                   6011:      unsigned comparison since zero-extension is cheaper than sign
                   6012:      extension and comparisons with zero are done as unsigned.  If we
                   6013:      are comparing against a constant, we must convert it to what it
                   6014:      would look like unsigned.  */
                   6015:   if ((code == EQ || code == NE) && ! unsignedp
                   6016:       && GET_MODE_BITSIZE (GET_MODE (op0)) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   6017:     {
                   6018:       if (GET_CODE (op1) == CONST_INT
                   6019:          && (INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0))) != INTVAL (op1))
                   6020:        op1 = gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode, 
                   6021:                       INTVAL (op1) & GET_MODE_MASK (GET_MODE (op0)));
                   6022:       unsignedp = 1;
                   6023:     }
                   6024:        
                   6025:   emit_cmp_insn (op0, op1, code, size, mode, unsignedp, align);
                   6026: 
                   6027:   return gen_rtx (code, VOIDmode, cc0_rtx, const0_rtx);
                   6028: }
                   6029: 
                   6030: /* Generate code to calculate EXP using a store-flag instruction
                   6031:    and return an rtx for the result.
                   6032:    If TARGET is nonzero, store the result there if convenient.
                   6033: 
                   6034:    If ONLY_CHEAP is non-zero, only do this if it is likely to be very
                   6035:    cheap.
                   6036: 
                   6037:    Return zero if there is no suitable set-flag instruction
                   6038:    available on this machine.
                   6039: 
                   6040:    Once expand_expr has been called on the arguments of the comparison,
                   6041:    we are committed to doing the store flag, since it is not safe to
                   6042:    re-evaluate the expression.  We emit the store-flag insn by calling
                   6043:    emit_store_flag, but only expand the arguments if we have a reason
                   6044:    to believe that emit_store_flag will be successful.  If we think that
                   6045:    it will, but it isn't, we have to simulate the store-flag with a
                   6046:    set/jump/set sequence.  */
                   6047: 
                   6048: static rtx
                   6049: do_store_flag (exp, target, mode, only_cheap)
                   6050:      tree exp;
                   6051:      rtx target;
                   6052:      enum machine_mode mode;
                   6053:      int only_cheap;
                   6054: {
                   6055:   enum rtx_code code;
                   6056:   tree arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 0);
                   6057:   tree arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (exp, 1);
                   6058:   tree tem;
                   6059:   tree type = TREE_TYPE (arg0);
                   6060:   enum machine_mode operand_mode = TYPE_MODE (type);
                   6061:   int unsignedp = TREE_UNSIGNED (type);
                   6062:   rtx op0, op1;
                   6063:   enum insn_code icode;
                   6064:   rtx subtarget = target;
                   6065:   rtx result, label, pattern, jump_pat;
                   6066: 
                   6067:   /* We won't bother with BLKmode store-flag operations because it would mean
                   6068:      passing a lot of information to emit_store_flag.  */
                   6069:   if (operand_mode == BLKmode)
                   6070:     return 0;
                   6071: 
                   6072:   while (TREE_CODE (arg0) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR)
                   6073:     arg0 = TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0);
                   6074: 
                   6075:   while (TREE_CODE (arg1) == NON_LVALUE_EXPR)
                   6076:     arg1 = TREE_OPERAND (arg1, 0);
                   6077: 
                   6078:   /* Get the rtx comparison code to use.  We know that EXP is a comparison
                   6079:      operation of some type.  Some comparisons against 1 and -1 can be
                   6080:      converted to comparisons with zero.  Do so here so that the tests
1.1.1.2 ! root     6081:      below will be aware that we have a comparison with zero.   These
        !          6082:      tests will not catch constants in the first operand, but constants
        !          6083:      are rarely passed as the first operand.  */
1.1       root     6084: 
                   6085:   switch (TREE_CODE (exp))
                   6086:     {
                   6087:     case EQ_EXPR:
                   6088:       code = EQ;
                   6089:       break;
                   6090:     case NE_EXPR:
                   6091:       code = NE;
                   6092:       break;
                   6093:     case LT_EXPR:
                   6094:       if (integer_onep (arg1))
                   6095:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
                   6096:       else
                   6097:        code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
                   6098:       break;
                   6099:     case LE_EXPR:
                   6100:       if (integer_all_onesp (arg1))
                   6101:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? LTU : LT;
                   6102:       else
                   6103:        code = unsignedp ? LEU : LE;
                   6104:       break;
                   6105:     case GT_EXPR:
                   6106:       if (integer_all_onesp (arg1))
                   6107:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
                   6108:       else
                   6109:        code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
                   6110:       break;
                   6111:     case GE_EXPR:
                   6112:       if (integer_onep (arg1))
                   6113:        arg1 = integer_zero_node, code = unsignedp ? GTU : GT;
                   6114:       else
                   6115:        code = unsignedp ? GEU : GE;
                   6116:       break;
                   6117:     default:
                   6118:       abort ();
                   6119:     }
                   6120: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     6121:   /* Put a constant second.  */
        !          6122:   if (TREE_CODE (arg0) == REAL_CST || TREE_CODE (arg0) == INTEGER_CST)
        !          6123:     {
        !          6124:       tem = arg0; arg0 = arg1; arg1 = tem;
        !          6125:       code = swap_condition (code);
        !          6126:     }
        !          6127: 
1.1       root     6128:   /* If this is an equality or inequality test of a single bit, we can
                   6129:      do this by shifting the bit being tested to the low-order bit and
                   6130:      masking the result with the constant 1.  If the condition was EQ,
                   6131:      we xor it with 1.  This does not require an scc insn and is faster
                   6132:      than an scc insn even if we have it.  */
                   6133: 
                   6134:   if ((code == NE || code == EQ)
                   6135:       && TREE_CODE (arg0) == BIT_AND_EXPR && integer_zerop (arg1)
                   6136:       && integer_pow2p (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1))
                   6137:       && TYPE_PRECISION (type) <= HOST_BITS_PER_INT)
                   6138:     {
                   6139:       int bitnum = exact_log2 (INTVAL (expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 1),
                   6140:                                                    0, VOIDmode, 0)));
                   6141: 
                   6142:       if (subtarget == 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget) != REG
                   6143:          || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
                   6144:          || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0)))
                   6145:        subtarget = 0;
                   6146: 
                   6147:       op0 = expand_expr (TREE_OPERAND (arg0, 0), subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6148: 
                   6149:       if (bitnum != 0)
                   6150:        op0 = expand_shift (RSHIFT_EXPR, GET_MODE (op0), op0,
                   6151:                            size_int (bitnum), target, 1);
                   6152: 
                   6153:       if (GET_MODE (op0) != mode)
                   6154:        op0 = convert_to_mode (mode, op0, 1);
                   6155: 
                   6156:       if (bitnum != TYPE_PRECISION (type) - 1)
                   6157:        op0 = expand_and (op0, const1_rtx, target);
                   6158: 
                   6159:       if (code == EQ)
                   6160:        op0 = expand_binop (mode, xor_optab, op0, const1_rtx, target, 0,
                   6161:                            OPTAB_LIB_WIDEN);
                   6162: 
                   6163:       return op0;
                   6164:     }
                   6165: 
                   6166:   /* Now see if we are likely to be able to do this.  Return if not.  */
                   6167:   if (! can_compare_p (operand_mode))
                   6168:     return 0;
                   6169:   icode = setcc_gen_code[(int) code];
                   6170:   if (icode == CODE_FOR_nothing
                   6171:       || (only_cheap && insn_operand_mode[(int) icode][0] != mode))
                   6172:     {
                   6173:       /* We can only do this if it is one of the special cases that
                   6174:         can be handled without an scc insn.  */
                   6175:       if ((code == LT && integer_zerop (arg1))
                   6176:          || (! only_cheap && code == GE && integer_zerop (arg1)))
                   6177:        ;
                   6178:       else if (BRANCH_COST >= 0
                   6179:               && ! only_cheap && (code == NE || code == EQ)
                   6180:               && TREE_CODE (type) != REAL_TYPE
                   6181:               && ((abs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
                   6182:                    != CODE_FOR_nothing)
                   6183:                   || (ffs_optab->handlers[(int) operand_mode].insn_code
                   6184:                       != CODE_FOR_nothing)))
                   6185:        ;
                   6186:       else
                   6187:        return 0;
                   6188:     }
                   6189:       
                   6190:   preexpand_calls (exp);
                   6191:   if (subtarget == 0 || GET_CODE (subtarget) != REG
                   6192:       || GET_MODE (subtarget) != operand_mode
                   6193:       || ! safe_from_p (subtarget, arg1))
                   6194:     subtarget = 0;
                   6195: 
                   6196:   op0 = expand_expr (arg0, subtarget, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6197:   op1 = expand_expr (arg1, 0, VOIDmode, 0);
                   6198: 
                   6199:   if (target == 0)
                   6200:     target = gen_reg_rtx (mode);
                   6201: 
                   6202:   result = emit_store_flag (target, code, op0, op1, operand_mode,
                   6203:                            unsignedp, 1);
                   6204: 
                   6205:   if (result)
                   6206:     return result;
                   6207: 
                   6208:   /* If this failed, we have to do this with set/compare/jump/set code.  */
                   6209:   if (target == 0 || GET_CODE (target) != REG
                   6210:       || reg_mentioned_p (target, op0) || reg_mentioned_p (target, op1))
                   6211:     target = gen_reg_rtx (GET_MODE (target));
                   6212: 
                   6213:   emit_move_insn (target, const1_rtx);
                   6214:   result = compare_from_rtx (op0, op1, code, unsignedp, operand_mode, 0, 0);
                   6215:   if (GET_CODE (result) == CONST_INT)
                   6216:     return result == const0_rtx ? const0_rtx : const1_rtx;
                   6217: 
                   6218:   label = gen_label_rtx ();
                   6219:   if (bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code] == 0)
                   6220:     abort ();
                   6221: 
                   6222:   emit_jump_insn ((*bcc_gen_fctn[(int) code]) (label));
                   6223:   emit_move_insn (target, const0_rtx);
                   6224:   emit_label (label);
                   6225: 
                   6226:   return target;
                   6227: }
                   6228: 
                   6229: /* Generate a tablejump instruction (used for switch statements).  */
                   6230: 
                   6231: #ifdef HAVE_tablejump
                   6232: 
                   6233: /* INDEX is the value being switched on, with the lowest value
                   6234:    in the table already subtracted.
1.1.1.2 ! root     6235:    MODE is its expected mode (needed if INDEX is ever constant).
1.1       root     6236:    RANGE is the length of the jump table.
                   6237:    TABLE_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx for the table itself.
                   6238: 
                   6239:    DEFAULT_LABEL is a CODE_LABEL rtx to jump to if the
                   6240:    index value is out of range.  */
                   6241: 
                   6242: void
1.1.1.2 ! root     6243: do_tablejump (index, mode, range, table_label, default_label)
1.1       root     6244:      rtx index, range, table_label, default_label;
1.1.1.2 ! root     6245:      enum machine_mode mode;
1.1       root     6246: {
                   6247:   register rtx temp, vector;
                   6248: 
1.1.1.2 ! root     6249:   /* Code below assumes that MODE is Pmode,
        !          6250:      but I think that is a mistake.  Let's see if that is true.  */
        !          6251:   if (mode != Pmode)
        !          6252:     abort ();
        !          6253: 
        !          6254:   emit_cmp_insn (range, index, LTU, 0, mode, 0, 0);
1.1       root     6255:   emit_jump_insn (gen_bltu (default_label));
                   6256:   /* If flag_force_addr were to affect this address
                   6257:      it could interfere with the tricky assumptions made
                   6258:      about addresses that contain label-refs,
                   6259:      which may be valid only very near the tablejump itself.  */
                   6260:   /* ??? The only correct use of CASE_VECTOR_MODE is the one inside the
                   6261:      GET_MODE_SIZE, because this indicates how large insns are.  The other
                   6262:      uses should all be Pmode, because they are addresses.  This code
                   6263:      could fail if addresses and insns are not the same size.  */
                   6264:   index = memory_address_noforce
                   6265:     (CASE_VECTOR_MODE,
                   6266:      gen_rtx (PLUS, Pmode,
                   6267:              gen_rtx (MULT, Pmode, index,
                   6268:                       gen_rtx (CONST_INT, VOIDmode,
                   6269:                                GET_MODE_SIZE (CASE_VECTOR_MODE))),
                   6270:              gen_rtx (LABEL_REF, Pmode, table_label)));
                   6271:   temp = gen_reg_rtx (CASE_VECTOR_MODE);
                   6272:   vector = gen_rtx (MEM, CASE_VECTOR_MODE, index);
                   6273:   RTX_UNCHANGING_P (vector) = 1;
                   6274:   convert_move (temp, vector, 0);
                   6275: 
                   6276:   emit_jump_insn (gen_tablejump (temp, table_label));
                   6277: 
                   6278: #ifndef CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
                   6279:   /* If we are generating PIC code or if the table is PC-relative, the
                   6280:      table and JUMP_INSN must be adjacent, so don't output a BARRIER.  */
                   6281:   if (! flag_pic)
                   6282:     emit_barrier ();
                   6283: #endif
                   6284: }
                   6285: 
                   6286: #endif /* HAVE_tablejump */

unix.superglobalmegacorp.com

This archive runs on limited infrastructure. Preserving old code on modern bandwidth. Automated agents are requested to crawl responsibly.